Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

BC MoTI - Volume 2 - 2020

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 452
At a glance
Powered by AI
The document outlines specifications for highway construction in British Columbia.

Volume 1 contains sections on quality management, construction site safety, general requirements for construction, protection of the environment, and traffic management for work zones.

Page 446 provides testing requirements and properties for performance graded cements, cutback asphalts, and emulsions.

2020 Standard Specifications

for Highway Construction

Volume 2 of 2
Adopted November 1, 2020
2020
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION

VOLUME 2

Adopted November 1, 2020


Construction and Maintenance Branch

Cover Photograph provided by TranBC Flickr site


https://www.flickr.com/photos/tranbc/25142726038/in/album-72157689494520851/
Installing rock-fall protection mesh
Hoffman's Bluff on Trans-Canada Hwy #1, east of Kamloops, BC
Contractor: Emil Anderson Construction Co. Ltd.
50° 43' 37.26" N; 119° 45' 55.49" W

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page I of VIII


Vol. 2 Page 3 of 452
Library and Archives Canada Cataloguing in Publication Data
British Columbia. Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure.
Standard specifications for highway construction – 2020 –

Issued by: Construction and Maintenance Branch

[For reference only: Companion Volume 1.]


ISBN 978-0-7726-7951-2 (Print)
ISBN 978-0-7726-7953-6 (PDF)

Volume 2:
ISBN 978-0-7726-7952-9 (Print)
ISBN 978-0-7726-7954-3 (PDF)

Standard specifications for highway construction


(British Columbia, Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure)

1. Roads – Specifications – British Columbia. 1. Title II. British Columbia.


Construction and Maintenance Branch
BC MoTI SS 2020 Page II of VIII
Vol. 2 Page 4 of 452
NOTICE TO USERS

Generally, text significantly changed or added since the 2016 edition is shown with single underlining and a vertical
bar in the margin; deletions are marked only by the vertical change bars. Not all changes are marked. Minor
corrections such as typos have not been marked.

Extensively modified Sections are watermarked as “Revised Section”; new Sections are watermarked “New Section”,
and neither have updates marked.

To obtain the 2020 Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Volumes 1 & 2
• Order online at www.crownpub.bc.ca/ , in the “search” field type in 7680003611 [or click on the number to
be hyperlinked to the order page], the Queen’s Printer stock number, select the item and click the “add to
cart” button or enter your customer number and postal code and click the logon button to access government
pricing. You will require a credit card to process this order. (Information is stored on a secure server.)

• Mail in a Company Cheque, Money Order or Certified Cheque payable to the Minister of Finance to:
Crown Publications, Queen’s Printer for BC.
Box 9452, Stn Prov Govt
Victoria BC V8W 9V7

• Phone toll free 1 (800) 663-6105 or locally in Victoria at (250) 387-6409, with your credit card or and we
will place the order for you.

Free PDF versions of the current and historical editions of these specifications are available for downloading at:
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/transportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
guidelines/standard-specifications-for-highway-construction

Please contact Construction and Maintenance Branch


for questions related to this document.

Construction and Maintenance Branch


Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure
940 Blanshard Street Level 4C
PO Box 9850 STN PROV GOVT
Victoria BC V8W 9T5
E-mail: TranRehab@gov.bc.ca

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page III of VIII


Vol. 2 Page 5 of 452
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page IV of VIII


Vol. 2 Page 6 of 452
SS SECTION TITLES
VOLUME ONE CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:

SECTION 000 – NOTES

SECTION 101 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT


SECTION 108 – SAMPLE FORMS
SECTION 125 – VALUE ENGINEERING PROPOSALS
SECTION 135 – CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 145 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY, BRIDGE AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 165 – PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
SECTION 194 – TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FOR WORK ZONES
SECTION 200 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 201 – ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION
SECTION 202 – GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB–BASES
SECTION 204 – ROCK CUTS
SECTION 205 – RIPRAP [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 206 – ROCK BOLTS
SECTION 207 – SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS
SECTION 208 – DRAINS FOR ROCK CUTS
SECTION 209 – SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS
SECTION 211 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
SECTION 213 – TIMBER BRIDGES – CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 214 – TIMBER PILING CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 215 – BRIDGES
SECTION 216 – COATING OF STEELWORK
SECTION 218 – CONCRETE FOR MINOR WORKS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 220 – SHOTCRETE AND SOIL ANCHOR WALLS [In development: Not yet available]
SECTION 232 – METAL BIN–WALL
SECTION 303 – CULVERTS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 308 – COATING SYSTEMS
SECTION 312 – STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 316 – STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS
SECTION 317 – P.E. PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE
SECTION 318 – PVC PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE
SECTION 320 – CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE
SECTION 321 – TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT AND SPECIAL MARKINGS
SECTION 407 – FOUNDATION EXCAVATION
SECTION 412 – CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page V of VIII


Vol. 2 Page 7 of 452
SECTION 413 – BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS
SECTION 415 – MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST AND PRECAST PRESTRESSED
CONCRETE MEMBERS
SECTION 416 – MANUFACTURE AND INSTALLATION OF POST–TENSIONED CONCRETE MEMBERS
SECTION 418 – SILANE TREATMENT OF NEW CONCRETE BRIDGE SURFACES [retitled]
SECTION 419 – CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM – PREFABRICATED
MEMBRANE
SECTION 420 – HOT APPLIED WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASPHALT OVERLAY
[In development: Not yet available]
SECTION 421 – STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
SECTION 422 – MISCELLANEOUS STEELWORK
SECTION 502 – ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS) [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 503 – BASE PREPARATION AND BASE PROCESSING
SECTION 504 – PAVEMENT DRAINAGE
SECTION 505 – USE OF RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT IN ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 507 – PRODUCTION AND STOCKPILING OF ASPHALT MIX
SECTION 508 – GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)
SECTION 511 – COLD MILLING
SECTION 515 – HOT–IN–PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)
SECTION 521 – ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE COURSE MIXED IN PLACE
SECTION 531 – ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS
SECTION 536 – PAVEMENT CRACK SEALING
SECTION 537 – SPRAY PATCHING [NEW SECTION]
SECTION 541 – STONE PAVING [retitled from “RUBBLE MASONRY”]
SECTION 582 – CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 586 – PLANT MIXED PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSE

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page VI of VIII


Vol. 2 Page 8 of 452
SS SECTION TITLES
VOLUME TWO CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:

SECTION 000 – NOTES

SECTION 604 – STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIER CONSTRUCTION


SECTION 635 – ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING
SECTION 700 – WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING
SECTION 741 – FENCE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 751 – TOPSOIL AND LANDSCAPE GRADING
SECTION 754 – PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS
SECTION 757 – REVEGETATION SEEDING
SECTION 766 – IRRIGATION
SECTION 769 – PROTECTION AND RETENTION OF VEGETATION
SECTION 904 – TIMBER (TREATED AND UNTREATED) [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 905 – TIMBER – GLUED LAMINATED
SECTION 906 – ROUND TIMBER PILES
SECTION 908 – PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT – WOOD PRODUCTS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 909 – TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 911 – STEEL AND IRON
SECTION 941 – PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS
SECTION 942 – PRECAST CONCRETE INTERLOCKING MODULAR BLOCKS [NEW SECTION]
SECTION 952 – CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE
SECTION 991 – CALCIUM CHLORIDE AND SODIUM CHLORIDE

THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS HAVE BEEN DELETED:


SECTION 903 – TIMBER – MATERIALS
SECTION 917 – WIRE ROPE
SECTION 933 – ADMIXTURES FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
SECTION 971 – PLASTIC TRAFFIC CONES

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page VII of VIII


Vol. 2 Page 9 of 452
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page VIII of VIII


Vol. 2 Page 10 of 452
SECTION 000

NOTES

000.01 Interpretation – Ministry names may have changed is to the applicable clause of the Ministry’s Major Works
from those identified in the Standard Specifications. A list General Conditions.
of current Ministries may be found at the following link
Where the Work is being performed under a different set of
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/governments/org terms and conditions (e.g the Minor Works General
anizational-structure/ministries- Conditions), the reference shall be read as being to the most
organizations/ministries comparable term and condition of the actual Contract.
Upon request by the Contractor, the Ministry Representative In the event there is uncertainty in determining the
will provide clarification as to which Ministry is currently applicable clause, the Ministry Representative will
responsible for any particular reference. determine how the reference is to be interpreted.
000.02 Hyperlinks – In the PDF version of this document, 000.04 Engineer of Record (EoR) / Professional of
many reference sources have been hyperlinked (such as the Record (PoR) – These two terms are used, essentially
reference in Note 000.01) and will show as blue underlined interchangeably, within these Standard Specifications and
text. are based on the Association of Professional Engineers and
Geoscientists of the Province of British Columbia’s
Clicking on the link will open the resource in your web
(APEGBC) definition and recent terminology change from
browser.
EoR to PoR.
Generally, links to test methods and specification
APEGBC’s definition, as expressed within their “Use of
organizations (like CSA or ASTM) will take you to a site
Seal” (and other) Quality Management Guidelines, is:
where you can purchase and download the associated
specifications; a link to a Ministry document, and some Professional of Record: The Engineering / Geoscience
others, within the text of a Section should take you to a Professional or licensee with the lowest level of direct
website where you can download the referenced document professional responsibility for the engineering or geoscience
free of charge. work and any related engineering or geoscience documents
produced, and whose seal appears on the documents. A test
Note: Due to MS Word® prioritizing “Track Changes” of “direct professional responsibility” is the ability of that
formatting over other formatting, some newly inserted Engineering/Geoscience Professional to alter or revise the
hyperlinks are not shown in blue. If there is underlined engineering or geoscience content in the master documents.
black text that looks like it might warrant a hyperlink, hover Whereas APEGBC is concerned only with Professional
your mouse over it to see if it does have an embedded link. Engineers and Geoscientists, usage in these Standard
000.02.01 Disclaimer – Any information, including statutes Specifications may also capture other registered professions
and regulations, that may be found by accessing URLs or such as Registered Professional Foresters (RPF), Registered
websites (including via hyperlinks) in these Standard Professional Biologists (RPBio), and other disciplines, as
Specifications are not the official versions and may not be appropriate to the circumstances.
accurate, complete, current or reliable. Each EoR/PoR is professionally responsible to the Ministry
000.03 General Condition (GC) References – Where for the works they have designed.
these Standard Specifications make a reference to a General
Condition (e.g. GC 38.00 Changes to Work), that reference

BC MoTI SS 2020 000 (1 of 1)


Vol. 2 Page 11 of 452
SECTION 604

STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIER CONSTRUCTION

DESCRIPTION Drawings SP312-1, SP312-2 and SP312-3, and/or to the


direction of the Ministry Representative.
604.01 Scope – This Section covers the construction of
roadside and median steel traffic barriers in accordance with The permissible tolerances for post installation are
the general layout and details indicated on SS Drawings of ±1.5 degrees from vertical for plumb and ±6 mm for
the SP312 series. alignment.
Steel beam guardrail, treated wood posts, steel posts and
Treated wood posts shall be driven in place with equipment
accessory materials are specified by SS 312.
approved by the Ministry Representative or set in augered
Design and part number references are taken from the Task or dug holes with necessary dampened and well tamped
Force 13 Hardware Guide, as noted in SS 312. layers of approved backfill material. Excavated material
which is unsuitable for use as backfill shall be substituted
604.02 Provision of Steel Barriers – Barriers of the type(s)
with granular material at the Contractor’s expense. Backfill
called for shall be constructed at the locations and as shown
shall be thoroughly compacted, using pneumatic tampers, in
on the Contract Drawings with the materials, accessories
layers not exceeding 150 mm, for the full depth of the
and necessary ancillary work all in accordance with the
excavation.
details indicated on the Contract Drawings, Specifications,
Special Provisions and/or typical standard SP Drawings or Driving will be permitted only if no damage results to
to the direction of the Ministry Representative. shoulders and adjacent slopes. In broken rock
All materials will be supplied by the Contractor, unless embankments the prepunching of holes will be permitted
otherwise stated in the Special Provisions. only prior to final compaction, surfacing and paving.
Construction details appertaining on exposed rock, rock
Construction shall be carried out with all labour, tools, with minimum overburden or on concrete shall be to the
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete all barrier indicated requirements and/or the direction of the Ministry
work in accordance with good work practice, for a Representative.
substantially supported and anchored steel barrier
developing a continuous beam strength together with All work preparatory to and for the installation of posts shall
necessary crashworthy end treatment. be to the direction and prior approval of the Ministry
Representative for each type of sub-surface condition to
produce a thoroughly sound guardrail support system.
MATERIALS
Surplus excavated material remaining after guardrail
604.10 Materials – Detailed material requirements are set support installation shall be disposed of in a uniform manner
out in SS 312 and indicated on SS Drawings SP312-1, within the right of way or cleared away, as directed by the
SP312-2, SP312-3, SP312-4, SP312-6, SP312-7, SP312-8, Ministry Representative.
SP312-11 and the manufacturer’s drawings.
Tops of all posts shall be set a uniform 25 mm ±5 mm above
Unless otherwise specified, treated wood shall meet the the line of the beam's top edge and where necessary cut to
requirements of SS 908. line up.
Touch-up treatment for damaged galvanized metal surfaces Posts damaged by the driving operation or other damage
shall be two heavy coats of zinc-rich paint selected from the from their handling and installation not acceptable to the
Ministry’s Recognized Products List under the category of Ministry Representative shall be replaced at the Contractor's
“Additional Paint Coatings – Zinc-Rich Touch-up Paints expense.
and Primers”.
Minor damage to the tops of posts and other wood
components and any field cuts and borings shall receive
CONSTRUCTION field treatment in accordance with SS 908.
604.20 Post Installation – Posts shall be set true to the 604.21 Steel Beam Erection – Beam sections will normally
lines, spacing, depth(s) and height(s) indicated or required be supplied or required for joining at 3.81 m intervals.
to provide a smooth, continuous installation. The layout, All punching, cutting or welding shall be shop executed
type of support and fixing treatment at ends of barriers or except for special details in unforeseen and exceptional
where adjacent to abutments and the like shall be as cases and to the prior approval of the Ministry
indicated on the Contract Drawings and relevant SS Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 604 (1 of 2)


Vol. 2 Page 12 of 452
SECTION 604 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIER CONSTRUCTION

Sections shall have full bearing one to another at laps with abutment and the like, rather than a bolted connector
splicing bolts drawn tight to 100 Nm for a continuous beam (like RWE02b).
effect. Where guardrail is on a curve, the beam sections
(b) Approach transitions stiffened by means of reduced
shall make close contact over the whole splice area. Shop
post spacing and, where necessary, the use of
bent beams will normally be supplied or required for
Thrie-beam or nested twin W-beams.
curvature radii under 45 metres.
Beam sections shall be bolted to posts so that the edges and
centre portion(s) of beams make full bearing with each MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
offset block or where applicable with back-up plate, post or
604.90 Measurement and Payment – Measurement of
other support.
steel traffic barriers will be by the linear metre from end to
Bolts shall not extend more than 15 mm beyond the fixing end of all rail sections along the line of the completed
nut when tightened, with any excess removed and the guardrail or centreline of any doubled median barrier and,
threads burred. unless otherwise specified, overall terminal assemblies.
Washers shall be used only where indicated on the SP312 Payment will be made for steel traffic barrier work at the
Drawing series. contract unit price(s) for standard steel W-beam shoulder or
median barrier guardrail supplied and/or installed complete
604.22 End Assemblies – End assemblies shall be carried
in place or for Thrie-beam shoulder or median barrier
out strictly according to the manufacturer’s specifications
guardrail supplied and/or installed complete in place.
unless specifically directed otherwise by the Ministry
Representative in writing as to approved alternative The contract price(s) shall be accepted as full compensation
methods and the like. for supply of all materials, labour, tools, equipment and
incidental work to complete the required installation
End assemblies shall be “Manual for Assessing Safety
including bolting, transitions, curves, all excavation,
Hardware (MASH)” certified.
backfilling, and surplus disposal.
Note the safety preference for the following items, which
will be shown on the Drawings if required:
(a) Continuing guardrail to shield the entire length of any
hazard (as indicated on SS Drawing SP312-1), bridge

BC MoTI SS 2020 604 (2 of 2)


Vol. 2 Page 13 of 452
SECTION 635

ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

PART A – GENERAL If working near overhead power lines the Contractor must
submit a WorkSafeBC Assurance of Compliance with
635.01 Scope – This Section covers the requirements for
Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, Part 19 form
electrical and signing works. Temporary construction
30M33. A sample of this document can be downloaded at:
signing is covered in SS 194 – Traffic Control.
https://www.worksafebc.com/en/resources/health-care-
The installation of materials shall be in accordance with the
providers/forms/assurance-of-compliance-with-
SS Drawings of the SP635 series unless otherwise specified.
occupational-health-and-safety-regulation-part-19-
Ministry Electrical Maintenance will be undertaken by non- form-30m33
Ministry forces, referred to as the “Electrical Maintenance
635.03 Electrical Permits & Inspections – Electrical work
Contractor”. The Contractor will be required to coordinate
shall be performed by a contractor licensed to do so by
the work with the Electrical Maintenance Contractor and the
Technical Safety BC. The licensed electrical contractor
appropriate Ministry Electrical Services Manager in the
shall appoint at least one licensed representative whose
Regions. Contact information is available from the Ministry
qualifications comply with the provisions of Technical
Representative, if necessary.
Safety BC. The Contractor shall provide the Ministry
The Contractor shall arrange the supply, installation and Representative with the name and phone number of the
removal of temporary C-63 (Traffic Pattern Changed), C-64 licensed representative prior to starting construction.
(Signal Operation Changed Signs) and W-329 (New) tabs
Prior to construction the Contractor shall obtain and pay for
with the Ministry Electrical Maintenance Contractor. The
all permits required by Technical Safety BC and submit a
Electrical Maintenance Contractor will supply, install and
copy of all permits to the Ministry Representative.
remove these signs at no expense to the Contractor.
Upon completion of an installation and prior to energizing,
The Contractor shall comply with the following Ministry
the Contractor shall advise the Ministry Representative that
publications:
the work is complete and ready for final inspection. The
(a) Standard Specifications for Highway Construction Ministry Representative will arrange for an inspection of the
installation and report deficiencies to the Contractor. The
(b) Electrical & Traffic Engineering Manual
Engineer of Record will conduct a review of the installation
(c) Electrical & Signing Materials Standards and assess conformance to the requirements of the Contract.
The Engineer of Record will then report all findings to the
(d) Manual of Traffic Signs & Pavement Marking Ministry Representative.
(e) Technical Bulletins & Technical Circulars (in effect at Once deficiencies identified by the Ministry Representative
the Tender Closing Date) and Engineer of Record have been corrected the Contractor
Materials used must listed on the Ministry Recognized will advise the Ministry Representative who will undertake
Products List or approved by the Ministry Representative. a final inspection and advise if acceptable. If acceptable,
the Ministry Representative will advise the Contractor the
The above documents can be downloaded from the Ministry installation has been completed satisfactorily. If not,
Engineering website at: additional corrections will be required by the Contractor.
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tran The Ministry will not accept the installation until all work
sportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards- has been approved by Technical Safety BC and the Ministry
guidelines Representative.
635.02 Work Regulations – All electrical work shall 635.04 Electrical Energy Supply – The electrical energy
comply with the latest edition of the Canadian Electrical will be supplied from overhead lines of the utility company's
Code and BC amendments, and any applicable standards or secondary distribution system unless otherwise noted on the
regulations published by the Province of British Columbia. Drawings.
The Contractor shall conform to all applicable Occupational The Engineer of Record shall determine all service
Health and Safety regulations and, if required, submit a connection points as noted on the Drawings. The
WorkSafeBC Notice of Project Form 52E49 before Contractor shall confirm all service connection points
commencing a Ministry project. The Notice of Project form before installing service equipment.
can be completed online at:
The Contractor shall be responsible for making the
https://www.worksafebc.com/en/for-employers/just- necessary arrangements with the utility company for the
for-you/submit-notice-project

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (1 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 14 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

connection of new service(s) and, if required, the Unless noted otherwise, all permanent signs shall meet
disconnection of existing service(s). The Ministry will pay current Ministry specifications. The Ministry Specifications
all utility connection costs. for Standard Highway Sign Materials, Fabrication and
Supply may be downloaded from the Ministry of
635.05 Materials – The Contractor shall supply all
Transportation engineering website at:
materials necessary for the satisfactory completion of the
project except those materials listed in the Special https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tra
Provisions as supplied by the Ministry. All materials shall nsportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
be new and conform to the requirements of the Drawings, guidelines/traffic-engineering-safety/traffic-signs-
other Subsections of the Specifications, the Special markings
Provisions, and the Ministry Electrical and Signing
Alternate materials must be approved by the Ministry
Material Standards.
Representative prior to their use.
A paper copy of the Electrical and Signing Material
635.06 Utilities – Existing utilities are generally not shown
Standards may be purchased from:
on the electrical and signing Drawings. Where utilities are
Government of British Columbia shown on the Drawings, their locations are approximate.
Ministry of Management Services
The Contractor shall locate and protect all existing utilities
Publication Index Website:
such as power lines, fibre optic cables, telephone lines, gas
http://crownpub.bc.ca
and oil pipelines, sewers, water works, etc. The Contractor
(Go Shopping)
shall conduct its operations in accordance with the
(Keywords: Electrical and Signing Material Standards
requirements of the utility authorities having jurisdiction. In
Manual)
the event of any damage to utilities, the Contractor shall be
email: crownpub@gov.bc.ca
held responsible for the cost of all necessary repairs and
Phone: (250) 387-6409 or 1-800-663-6105
restoration to the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative
Fax: (250) 387-1120
and Utility Authority.
Address: PO BOX 9452 STN PROV GOVT
VICTORIA BC V8W 9V7 All costs for locating and protecting utilities will be
considered incidental to the Work.
An electronic copy of the Electrical and Signing Material
Standards may be downloaded free of charge from the
Ministry of Transportation engineering website at:
PART B – UNDERGROUND
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tran
635.07 Concrete Bases – Concrete bases shall be
sportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
constructed in accordance with SS Drawings SP635-1.1.1
guidelines/electrical-engineering
through SP635-1.1.47 and SP635-1.4.1 through
All products contained in the Electrical and Signing SP635-1.4.5. The use of the term "concrete bases" in
Material Standards shall be supplied from the Ministry's SS 635 shall also mean "concrete spread footings" where
Recognized Products List. This list identifies the applicable.
manufacturer, the approved product, the product model
The Drawings may refer to concrete bases that are poured-
number, and the product approval date. An electronic copy
of the Ministry Recognized Products List can be in-place or precast. If there is no reference to poured-in-
downloaded from the Ministry of Transportation place bases, concrete bases shall be precast.
engineering website at: Concrete single post sign bases listed in the Ministry
Recognized Products List (RPL) shall be considered
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tran
acceptable alternates to the Ministry Standard concrete
sportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
single post sign bases when approved by the Engineer of
guidelines/recognized-products-list
Record for the sign base.
This list is updated regularly.
Supply and installation of concrete bases shall include the
Electrical materials shall meet the requirements of the following:
Canadian Electrical Code, conform to applicable CSA
• excavation and backfill;
Standards, and meet the approval of Technical Safety BC.
• supply and installation of concrete and formwork;
If specified in the Special Provisions, shop drawings shall
be submitted to the Ministry Representative for review by • supply and installation of reinforcing steel;
the Engineer of Record. Equipment shall not be ordered
until the contractor has received approval from the Ministry • supply and installation of conduit;
Representative. • supply and installation of steel tubing sleeves in sign
post bases; and

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (2 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 15 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

• installation of anchor bolts. (c) QCAST Certification Program by the American


Concrete Pipe Association for Precast Products
The Contractor shall check for conflicts with overhead lines
prior to excavating for concrete bases. If it appears there (d) National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA) Plant
may be an overhead conflict, the Contractor shall contact Certification
the Ministry Representative for further instructions. If the
(e) Other certification organizations acceptable to the
Contractor installs a concrete base in a location where the
Ministry Representative that are accredited by the
pole conflicts with overhead power lines, the Contractor
Standards Council of Canada for the certification of
shall remove the pole and relocate the concrete base to a
manufacturers for these products.
location approved by the Ministry Representative. The
Contractor shall pay all costs for pole and base relocation. For all contracts awarded after December 31, 2021,
manufactures shall be prequalified under CSA A23.4 by one
635.07.01 Excavation and Backfill – Excavations shall
of the above listed certification bodies.
meet the requirements, but not the Quantities and Payment
provisions of SS 407 – Foundation Excavation. Cast-in-place concrete bases and precast concrete bases that
are fabricated on site shall meet the requirements of CSA
All excavation work shall be carried out as required to suit
A23.1 and the Contractor shall notify the Ministry
concrete bases. Where directed by the Ministry
Representative 48 hours prior to pouring concrete.
Representative, excavations shall be shored to avoid the
Proportioning of the concrete mixes shall be the
cutting of pavement, sidewalks, and curb and gutter.
responsibility of the Contractor. SS 211 shall only apply
Base excavations shall be backfilled using the excavated when specifically referenced.
material provided it consists of clean well graded granular
The concrete mix shall meet the specifications listed in
soil having a maximum fines content of 8% (silt and clay
Table 635- A.
size particles) and a maximum aggregate size of 100 mm.
Where backfill material does not conform as noted above,
base excavation shall be backfilled with 25 mm Well Table 635- A: Concrete Mix
Graded Base Course Aggregate material as specified in
SS 635.16. Unacceptable materials shall be disposed of as Property Criteria
specified in SS 635.17. Minimum compressive
30 MPa
Backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm strength at 28 days
compacted thickness (100 mm compacted thickness in the Nominal maximum
top 300 mm) and shall be compacted to a minimum 100% 20 mm or 28 mm
aggregate size
of the Standard Proctor maximum dry density obtained by
Maximum W/Cm ratio by
ASTM D698. Layer thickness shall be reduced and 0.40
mass
moisture content of the material adjusted as required to
achieve compaction. Care shall be taken not to damage Air content – 20 mm
5-8%
conduits. nominal maximum aggregate
All excavated and backfilled areas shall be restored to their Air content – 28 mm
4-7%
original condition. nominal maximum aggregate
Maximum Plasticized Slump 80 ± 20 mm
Asphalt restoration shall be performed in accordance with
SS 635.12. S1 with the addition of
Class of Exposure chloride and freeze-
Concrete curb and gutter restoration shall be performed in thaw exposures
accordance with SS 635.15.
635.07.02 Concrete and Formwork – Precast concrete
All exposed concrete surfaces shall be given a Class 3 finish
bases shall meet the requirements of CSA A23.4. Suppliers
and all buried surfaces a Class 1 finish in accordance with
of precast concrete bases listed on the Ministry Recognized
SS 211.17.
Products List shall be considered as prequalified
manufacturers of concrete bases under CSA A23.4. When constructing poured-in-place concrete bases, the
Contractor shall have the concrete compressive strength
Alternatively, manufacturers shall be prequalified under
verified, using concrete test cylinders, prior to installing the
CSA A23.4 by one of the following certification bodies:
structure onto the base.
(a) The Canadian Precast Concrete Quality Assurance
The Contractor must provide written confirmation of
(CPCQA) Certification Program
concrete test cylinder compressive strength results prior to
(b) The CSA Group Testing & Certification Inc. (CSA) installing any structure on the bases.
Certification Program.

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (3 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 16 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

The top finished surface of a concrete base shall not vary by 635.08 Junction Boxes and Vaults
more than 3 mm in depth as measured across the widest
635.08.01 – General
surface. If this variation exceeds 3 mm then the top 50 mm
of the base shall be broken off by hand and reformed or the (a) Plastic Junction Boxes – Plastic junction boxes and
base shall be replaced, as directed by the Ministry their lids/hatches shall be in accordance with SS
Representative. Drawings SP635-1.2.1 through SP635-1.2.16 and
SP635-1.4.1 through SP635-1.4.3.
635.07.03 Reinforcing Steel – Reinforcing steel shall meet
the requirements, but not the payment provisions, of SS 412 (b) Concrete Junction Boxes – Concrete junction boxes
– Reinforcing Steel. and their lids/hatches shall be in accordance with SS
Drawings SP635-1.3.1 through SP635-1.3.4.
All reinforcing steel shall conform to CSA G30.18-M,
Grade 400W or 400R. (c) Concrete Vaults – Concrete vaults and their
lids/hatches shall be in accordance with SS Drawings
The Contractor shall adjust the spacing of reinforcing steel
SP635-1.3.3 and SP635-1.3.4.
to suit anchor bolts and conduit.
635.08.02 Plastic Junction Boxes – Plastic junction boxes
635.07.04 Anchor Bolts and Conduit – Anchor bolts and
listed in the Contract documents, Special Provisions or in
conduits shall be cast into the concrete bases.
the Ministry Recognized Products List (RPL) shall be
Where an anchor bolt is damaged it shall be repaired in considered acceptable. Installation of plastic junction boxes
accordance with SS Drawings SP635-1.1.43 and shall be accordance with SS Drawings SP635-1.2.1 through
SP635-1.1.44. SP635-1.2.16 and SP635-1.4.1 through SP635-1.4.3.
Welding of anchor bolts shall not be permitted. 635.08.03 Concrete Junction Boxes and Vaults Not
Located in an Area with Routine Vehicle Access –
635.07.05 Steel Pipe Sleeves – Steel pipe sleeves shall be
Concrete junction boxes, concrete vaults and their
cast into the concrete bases. The type of sleeve shall be as
lids/hatches that are located in areas that do not have routine
noted on the Drawings and shall be in accordance with
traffic access, including but not limited to, sidewalks and
SS 635.30 or SS 635.31
landscaped areas, shall meet the requirements of
635.07.06 Payment – Payment for CONCRETE BASES SS 635.08.03.
will be at the Unit Price per base.
Concrete junction boxes, concrete vaults and their
The Unit Price shall include all costs for the supply and lids/hatches that are located in areas that do not have routine
installation of the bases, including but not limited to, all traffic access shall be designed by engineers registered with
Type D excavation; supply and installation of shoring to the Association of Professional Engineers and Geoscientists
meet Workers Compensation Act and Occupational Health of the Province of BC. The design shall be in accordance
and Safety Regulation requirements; formwork, concrete, with recognised and applicable CSA, ASTM or AASHTO
reinforcing steel and conduit; supply and installation of standards. Design drawings and Letters of Assurance
grout and sand to fill knock-out voids in bases, controller meeting the requirements of the Ministry Technical Circular
bases and concrete pads in front of controller bases; supply T-06/09 Engineer of Record and Field Review Guidelines
and installation of steel sleeves in sign post bases; shall be submitted to the Ministry Representative for review
installation of individual anchor bolts or anchor bolts in and acceptance at least two (2) weeks prior to delivery.
cages; placing and compaction of excavated material as Concrete vaults and their lids/hatches shall meet the
backfill; removal and disposal of excess excavated material; requirements for non-deliberate vehicular loading using the
and all other labour, equipment, and materials necessary to wheel loading for either of the following:
complete the installation.
(a) The design live load in accordance with the Ministry
Any additional costs for supplying higher strength concrete Supplement to the CHBDC S6, or
shall be borne by the Contractor.
(b) AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges
Payment for excavation of Type A material (solid rock) and HL-93, H-20 or HS-20
de-watering of excavations will be made in accordance with
635.08.04 Concrete Junction Boxes and Vaults located in
GC 38.00 Changes to Work.
Traffic Areas – Concrete junction boxes, concrete vaults
Where excavated material is ruled unacceptable for backfill, and their lids/hatches that are located in areas with routine
payment for 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate traffic access, including but not limited to, vehicular
used as backfill will be made under SS 635.16.01. roadways, vehicular pull-outs, parking areas, and
driveways, shall meet the requirements of SS 635.08.04.
Concrete junction boxes, concrete vaults and their
lids/hatches shall be designed by engineers registered with
the Association of Professional Engineers and Geoscientists

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (4 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 17 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

of the Province of BC. Design drawings and Letters of be 25 mm and the minimum cover shall be 10 mm.
Assurance meeting the requirements of the Ministry When requested, the Contractor shall submit the
Technical Circular T-06/09 Engineer of Record and Field proposed mix design and detailed documentation for
Review Guidelines shall be submitted to the Ministry ministry review, a minimum of 14 days in advance of
Representative for review and acceptance at least two (2) fabrication, which shall include as a minimum the
weeks prior to delivery. following:
Concrete junction boxes and concrete vaults located in areas (i) Details of the products the Contractor proposes to
with routine vehicle access shall be designed in accordance fabricate using no-slump concrete, and
with the Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code (CHBDC)
(ii) Reinforcement details and concrete cover for
CSA S6 and the Ministry Supplement to CHBDC S6. The
reinforcement, and
design live load shall be in accordance with the Ministry
Supplement to the CHBDC S6. (iii) Concrete mix design submittals in accordance with
SS635.09, and
The lids/hatches for concrete vaults that are located in areas
with routine traffic access shall be designed in accordance (iv) Documentation demonstrating that the proposed
with either of the following: mix design will achieve the required strength,
durability, and performance requirements
(a) Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code (CHBDC)
including the documentation and test results for the
CSA S6 and the Ministry Supplement to CHBDC S6,
proposed mix design in accordance with CSA
or
A23.1 Clause 8.9 – No-slump concrete.
(b) ASTM 1802 – Standard Specification for Design,
The Ministry Representative may also request
Testing, Manufacture, Selection, and Installation of
additional documentation be submitted to assist in the
Fabricated Metal Horizontal Access Hatches for
ministry review of the mix design for no-slump
Utility, Water, and Wastewater Structures, Load
concrete. If, in the sole discretion of the Ministry
Level 7, Full Traffic.
Representative, the submitted documentation does not
635.08.05 Concrete for Junction Boxes and Vaults – demonstrate acceptable performance of the no-slump
SS 211 shall only apply to concrete for junction boxes and concrete, then no-slump concrete shall not be used.
vaults when specifically referenced.
(c) Concrete for junction boxes and vaults that are located
(a) Concrete for junction boxes and vaults that are located in areas with routine traffic access shall be in
in areas that do not have routine traffic access shall be accordance with CSA S6 for exposure to harsh
in accordance with CSA A23.1 and CSA A23.4 based conditions and shall meet the following:
on a minimum service life of 40 years and shall meet
(i) Minimum specified compressive strength of
the following:
35 MPa at 28 days
(i) Minimum specified compressive strength of
(ii) S1 class of exposure with the addition of chloride
35 MPa at 28 days
exposure
(ii) S1 class of exposure with the addition of chloride
(iii) Exposed to cycles of freeze/thaw
exposure
(iv) Maximum water-to-cementitious materials ratio
(iii) Exposed to cycles of freeze/thaw
(W/Cm) of 0.40
(iv) Maximum water-to-cementitious materials ratio
(v) Rapid chloride permeability test result (ASTM
(W/Cm) of 0.40
C1202) of less than 1000 coulombs within 91 days
(v) Rapid chloride permeability test result (ASTM
635.08.06 Concrete Junction Box and Vault Fabrication
C1202) of less than 1000 coulombs within 91 days
(a) Certified Manufacturers – For all contracts awarded
(vi) Minimum cover on exterior surfaces 40 mm;
after December 31, 2021, concrete junction boxes and
minimum cover on interior surfaces 25 mm
vaults shall be fabricated in facilities that are certified
(b) No-slump concrete meeting the requirements of CSA by an independent industry recognized certification
A23.1 shall be an acceptable alternative for concrete body specific to the products being fabricated.
junction boxes located in areas that do not have routine
The certification body shall be qualified to inspect and
traffic access. Galvanized or stainless steel
evaluate all the relevant procedures, facilities, and
reinforcement shall be used with no-slump concrete
personnel of the manufacturer as to conformity with
when the minimum concrete cover identified above
required standards and shall be acceptable to the
cannot be achieved for thin products. When using
Ministry. Certification shall be in effect prior to the
galvanized or stainless steel reinforcement with no-
slump concrete, the minimum product thickness shall

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (5 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 18 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

beginning of Work and shall be maintained throughout Asphalt restoration shall be performed in accordance with
the period of manufacture. SS 635.14.
Concrete junction boxes and vaults shall be fabricated Concrete curb and gutter restoration shall be performed in
in accordance with CSA A23.4. Acceptable accordance with SS 635.15.
certification bodies for concrete junction boxes and
Lid/hatch hold down bolts shall be coated with anti-seize
vault manufacturers include:
lubricant.
(i) The Canadian Precast Concrete Quality Assurance
635.08.08 Payment – Payment for PLASTIC JUNCTION
(CPCQA) Certification Program
BOXES will be at the Contract Unit Price per junction box.
(ii) Certification organizations accredited by the
The Unit Price shall include all costs of excavation, other
Standards Council of Canada (i.e. Canadian
than concrete and asphalt removal; installation of junction
Standards Association (CSA))
box sections, steel lids/hatches, drain plates, adapter plates
(iii) QCAST Certification Program by the American and braces; supply and installation of shoring to meet WCB
Concrete Pipe Association for Precast Products requirements, conductor support bars in boxes, concrete
collars, 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate
(iv) National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA)
material below the junction box; placing and compaction of
Plant Certification
excavated material as backfill; removal and disposal of
(b) Lids and Hatches – All junction box and vault lids and excess excavated material; and all other labour, equipment
hatches shall be galvanized steel and shall be fabricated and materials necessary to complete the installation.
in accordance with SS 422.
Payment for the excavation of Type A material (solid rock),
635.08.07 Installation – Excavations for junction boxes de-watering of excavations, and additional drainage in
and vaults shall meet the requirements, but not the vaults will be made in accordance with GC 38.00 Changes
Quantities and Payment provisions, of SS 407 – Foundation to Works.
Excavation.
Where excavated material is ruled unacceptable for backfill,
All excavation work shall be carried out as required to suit payment for 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate
junction boxes and vaults. Where directed by the Ministry will be made under SS 635.16.01.
Representative, excavations shall be shored to avoid the
635.08.09 Payment – Payment for CONCRETE
cutting of pavement, sidewalks and curb and gutter.
JUNCTION BOXES AND VAULTS will be at the Contract
Junction boxes and vaults shall be installed on a bedding of Unit Price per junction box or vault.
25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate material in
The Unit Price shall include all costs of excavation, other
accordance with SS 202 – Granular Surfacing, Base and
than concrete and asphalt removal; supply and installation
Sub-bases.
of the concrete junction box or vault complete with collar
If accepted by the Ministry Representative, junction box or and lid/hatch; supply and installation of conductor supports;
vault excavations may be backfilled using the excavated supply and installation of 25 mm Well Graded Base Course
material. Where new material is required, 25 mm Well Aggregate material below concrete junction box or the
Graded Base Course Aggregate material shall be used as vault; placing and compaction of excavated material as
specified in SS 635.16. backfill; removal and disposal of excess excavated material;
and all other labour, equipment and materials necessary to
Unacceptable materials shall be disposed of as specified in complete the installation.
SS 635.17.
Payment for the excavation of Type A material (solid rock)
Bedding and backfill material shall be placed in layers not
de-watering of excavations, and additional drainage in
exceeding 100 mm compacted thickness and shall be
vaults will be made in accordance with GC 38.00 Changes
compacted to a minimum 95% of the Standard Proctor
to Works.
maximum dry density obtained by ASTM D698. Layer
thickness shall be reduced and moisture content of the Where excavated material is ruled unacceptable for backfill,
material adjusted as required to achieve compaction. Care payment for 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate
shall be taken not to damage conduits. will be made under SS 635.16.01.
Unless otherwise shown, the top of junction boxes and 635.09 Concrete Mix Design Submittals – When
vaults shall be installed so that they are flush with the requested by the Ministry Representative, the Contractor
finished grade. Concrete for junction box collars shall shall submit concrete mix design information for bases,
conform to SS 635.08.05 junction boxes and vaults for Ministry quality assurance and
compliance review. Submittals shall be done using the
All areas where excavation and backfilling have been
requirements of CSA A23.1 Table 5 Alternative 1. The
performed shall be restored to their original condition.

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (6 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 19 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

submittals shall meet the requirements of CSA A23.1 and performance for the required strength, durability,
include the following. and other performance requirements of the
proposed mix design in the fabrication of products
635.09.01 Project Specifics
similar to those proposed for the use of SCC in the
(a) Name and location of the proposed supplier. Work, or
(b) Expected method of batching, transporting and placing (ii) A full-scale test shall be used to verify the self-
concrete. consolidating characteristics for placement and for
the hardened concrete properties of the mix design
(c) Mix parameters including plastic properties, structural for the proposed application. Documentation in
requirements and durability requirements. accordance with CSA A23.2-24C shall be
(d) Name and contact information of quality control testing submitted demonstrating that the proposed mix
laboratory and certified testing personnel. design will achieve the required strength,
durability, and performance requirements.
635.09.02 Materials
The Ministry Representative may also request additional
(a) Cementitious Materials – Types and source of each documentation be submitted to assist in the ministry review.
material including mill test reports and manufacturer’s If, in the sole discretion of the Ministry Representative, the
certificates of compliance. submitted documentation does not demonstrate acceptable
(b) Aggregates – Type and source of all individual performance of the SCC, then SCC shall not be used.
aggregate products including individual gradations and 635.11 Conduits – All electrical conduits shall be installed
aggregate quality testing in accordance with the Drawings.
(c) Admixtures – Type and source of all admixtures, point Rigid PVC (RPVC) conduit shall be unplasticized polyvinyl
of addition to the mix, and individual technical data chloride and conform to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2. Couplings,
sheets. adapters, bends and fittings shall be unplasticized polyvinyl
(d) Water – The source of mixing water and water quality chloride and conform to CSA C22.2 No. 85. RPVC conduit
test data shall be installed using CSA certified cement. Each
standard length of RPVC conduit and fitting shall bear a
(e) Miscellaneous – Documentation for all other materials certification mark to the applicable CSA standard.
proposed for the mix, showing conformance with
applicable requirements and manufacturer/industry Rigid metal conduit (RMC) shall be hot-dipped galvanized
guidelines and standards. rigid steel and conform to CSA C22.2 No. 45. Any exposed
metal on conduit shall be coated with cold galvanizing
635.09.03 Documentation – Documentation demonstrating compound in accordance with SS 635.25.
that the proposed mix design will achieve the required
plastic properties, strength, durability, and performance High-density polyethylene (HDPE) conduit shall conform
requirements. to CSA 22.2 No. 327. Markings on the conduit shall meet
the requirements of the Canadian Electrical Code.
635.10 Self Consolidating Concrete - Self Consolidating Communication conduits shall be orange in colour.
Concrete (SCC) meeting the requirements of CSA A23.1
may be considered for use on a product and project specific Flexible liquid-tight non-metallic conduit (FC) shall
basis. The use of SCC is subject to the approval of the conform to CSA 22.2 No. 227.2. All joints shall be made
Ministry Representative. with FC threaded couplers, adapters or conduit fittings.
635.10.01 Consideration of SCC – For the use of SCC to Flexible liquid-tight metal conduit (FMC) shall conform to
be considered, the Contractor shall submit the proposed mix CSA 22.2 No. 56. All joints shall be made with FMC
design and detailed documentation for ministry review, a threaded couplers, adapters or conduit fittings.
minimum of 28 days in advance of fabrication, which shall Conduit straps shall be galvanized steel single hole or
include as a minimum the following: double hole type (sized to suit conduit).
(a) Details of the products the Contractor proposes to All empty conduits shall have a pull string and shall be
fabricate using SCC, and capped in accordance with SS Drawings SP635-1.2.16,
(b) Concrete mix design submittals in accordance with SP635-1.3.5, and SP635-1.7.1. Pull string shall be
SS635.09, and polypropylene with a minimum tensile strength of 1.1 kN.
(c) Documentation in accordance with either of the The Contractor shall lay out conduit so that 90° bends are
following: avoided. Where 90° bend cannot be avoided, only one will
be allowed for each conduit run.
(i) Details in accordance with CSA A23.2-24C
documenting the proven history of successful

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (7 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 20 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

Conduit couplings or bell ends damaged when pulling Concrete curb and gutter and sidewalk restoration shall be
conductors shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractor’s performed in accordance with SS 635.15.
expense. An appropriate pulling jig or method shall be used
635.12.01 Payment – Payment for TRENCHING AND
to avoid damaging conduit or fittings when pulling
BACKFILLING FOR CONDUIT will be at the Unit Price
conductors.
per metre.
635.11.01 Payment – Payment for CONDUIT will be at the
The Unit Price shall include all costs of Type D excavation,
Unit Price per metre.
other than concrete and asphalt removal; placing and
The Unit Price shall include all costs for the supply and compaction of excavated material as backfill; dewatering;
installation of underground conduit, fittings, cement and supply and installation of trench marker tape; removal and
pull strings; and all other labour, equipment and materials disposal of excess excavated material; and all other labour,
necessary to complete the installation. equipment and materials necessary to complete the
installation.
Payment for conduits installed above ground on poles or
sign structures is not included in this Subsection. Payment for excavation of Type A material (solid rock) will
be made in accordance with GC 38.00 Changes to Work.
635.12 Trenching and Backfilling for Conduit –
Trenching and backfilling shall be performed in accordance Where excavated material is ruled unacceptable for backfill,
with SS Drawings SP635-1.5.1, SP635-1.5.2, SP635-1.6.1, payment for 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate
SP635-1.6.2 and SP635-1.7.1. will be made under SS 635.16.01.
RPVC conduits shall be installed in an open trench in 635.13 Trenchless Conduit Installation – Where noted on
accordance with SS Drawings SP635-1.5.1, SP635-1.5.2, the Drawings the Contractor shall install the conduit using
SP635-1.6.1, SP635-1.6.2 and SP635-1.7.1 except where a suitable trenchless technology to avoid cutting the existing
conduits are to be drilled or pushed under the surface as pavement or sidewalk.
specified in SS 635.13.
The trenchless technology selected shall suit the site
Trenches shall be excavated with neat, uniform sides to the conditions.
minimum width necessary, but not less than the minimum
The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative a
dimensions indicated on SS Drawings SP635-1.5.1 and
minimum of 48-hours prior to installing conduits.
SP635-1.5.2 (care shall be taken to prevent sloughing).
Material in the floor of the trench shall be undisturbed, or if The Contractor shall locate all underground utilities prior to
disturbed shall be re-compacted to the requirement herein installing conduits.
for backfill.
635.13.01 Payment – Payment for installing conduit using
Where approved by the Ministry Representative excavated trenchless technology will be at the Contract Unit Price per
material may be used as backfill. Where new material is metre.
required, 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate
The Unit Price shall include all costs of excavation for set
material shall be used as specified in SS 635.16.
up; backfilling and restoration when finished, and all other
Unacceptable materials shall be disposed of as specified in
labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete the
SS 635.17.
installation.
A 150 mm wide yellow plastic marker tape indicating
"WARNING ELECTRICAL" shall be installed in each No separate payment will be made for unsuccessful
trench for the complete length of the trench. The location installation.
of the marker tape shall be as shown on SS Drawings Payment for the supply and installation of conduit is
SP635-1.5.1 and SP635-1.5.2. covered under SS 635.11.01.
Bedding and backfill material shall be placed in layers not 635.14 Asphalt Pavement – Asphalt paving shall be
exceeding 100 mm compacted thickness and shall be performed in accordance with SS 502.
compacted to a minimum 100% (for road crossings) and
95% (for shoulder trenches) of the Standard Proctor Asphalt patching of conduit trenches shall be performed in
maximum dry density obtained by ASTM D698. Layer accordance with SS Drawing SP635-1.5.1. Asphalt
thickness shall be reduced, and moisture content of the patching of excavations for junction boxes, vaults and bases
material adjusted as required to achieve compaction. Care shall be performed similar to the details shown on SS
shall be taken not to damage conduits. Drawing SP635-1.5.1.

All areas where trenching and backfilling have been Contrary to the requirements of Section 502, Asphalt
performed shall be restored to their original condition. placing by a paving machine will not be required. Asphalt
pavement restoration shall be Class 1 medium mix installed
Asphalt restoration shall be performed in accordance with in three 50 mm lifts unless otherwise noted or directed by
SS 635.14. the Ministry Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (8 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 21 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

The Contractor shall use a pavement saw to cut pavement Concrete shall meet the requirements of Note 1 on SS
and shall exercise care to obtain a neat, uniform excavation Drawing SP582-01.01.
line along the edge of the pavement. The Contractor shall
The Contractor shall use a pavement saw to cut existing
also prevent the existing base gravel from sloughing and
concrete unless otherwise directed by the Ministry
undermining the pavement.
Representative, and shall obtain a neat, uniform cut along
Where three lifts of asphalt pavement are being placed to the edge of concrete. The Contractor shall also prevent base
reinstate a trench, the first two lifts shall be compacted with gravel from sloughing and undermining the concrete.
vibratory equipment capable of operating within the
635.15.01 Payment – Payment for CONCRETE CURBS
excavated area and of compacting over the whole of it. The
will be at the Contract Unit Price in accordance with SS 582
third lift shall be compacted with rolling equipment to
– Concrete Curb and Gutter and Storm Drainage.
produce a uniform surface matching the adjacent existing
pavement. The Unit Price shall include all costs of excavation, other
than concrete and asphalt removal; supply and installation
635.14.01 Payment – Payment for ASPHALT
of 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate bedding
PAVEMENT for electrical and signing work will be as
material; supply and installation of formwork, concrete and
follows.
expansion joint material; removal and disposal of excess
(a) Where the electrical work forms part of a paving or excavated material; and all other labour, equipment and
road construction Project, measurement and payment materials necessary to complete the installation.
will be made in accordance with SS 502.
635.15.02 Payment – Payment for SIDEWALKS will be at
(b) Where the electrical work does not form part of a the Contract Unit Price per square metre.
paving or road construction Project, payment shall be
The Unit Price shall include all costs of excavation, other
made in accordance with SS 502, except that:
than concrete and asphalt removal; supply and installation
(i) No separate payment shall be made for spray of 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate bedding
primer and tack coat and all costs of this work shall material; supply and installation of formwork, concrete and
be included. expansion joint material; removal and disposal of excess
excavated material; and all other labour, equipment and
(ii) Measurement for payment for conduit trenches
materials necessary to complete the installation.
shall be made in cubic meters of mix compacted in
place and shall be calculated using a 450 mm wide 635.15.03 Payment – Payment for REMOVAL OF
trench plus 300 mm (asphalt is excavated 150 mm CONCRETE will be at the Contract Unit Price per cubic
beyond the trench on both sides as noted on SS metre.
Drawing SP635-1.5.1).
The Unit Price shall include all costs for the cutting,
(iii) Measurement for payment for installation of all removing and disposing of existing concrete roadway,
other works shall be made in cubic metres of mix sidewalk, etc.; and all other labour, equipment and materials
compacted in place and shall be calculated from necessary to complete the removal of concrete.
measurements of the work.
The volume for payment of concrete removal for conduit
635.14.02 Payment – Payment for REMOVAL OF trenches will be calculated by the actual volume of concrete
ASPHALT will be made at the Contract Unit Price per cubic removed within a 450 mm wide trench.
metre.
The volume for payment of concrete removal for all other
The Unit Price shall include all costs of cutting, removing work will be calculated from measurements of the work.
and disposing of existing asphalt; and all other labour,
635.15.04 Payment – Payment for REMOVAL OF
equipment and materials necessary to complete the removal
CONCRETE CURBS will be at the Contract Unit Price per
of asphalt.
metre.
The volume for payment of asphalt removal for conduit
The Unit Price shall include all costs for cutting, removing
trenches will be calculated by the actual volume of asphalt
and disposing of existing concrete; and all other labour,
removed within a 450 mm wide trench plus 300 mm
equipment and materials necessary to complete the removal
(asphalt is excavated 150 mm beyond the trench on both
of concrete curbs.
sides as noted on SS Drawing SP635.1.5.1).
635.16 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate –
The volume for payment of asphalt removal for all other
25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate shall meet the
work will be calculated from measurements of the work.
requirements of SS 202 – Granular Surfacing, Base and
635.15 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks – Concrete curbs Sub-bases.
and sidewalks shall be installed in accordance with SS 582
When acceptable excavated material is not available,
– Concrete Curb and Gutter and Storm Drainage.
25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate shall be used

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (9 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 22 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

as backfill. It shall also be used for additional backfill PART C – ELECTRICAL


around bases, junction boxes, vaults, median island fill, and
635.19 Luminaire, Signal and Sign Poles – Luminaire and
other work as approved by the Ministry Representative.
signal poles shall be installed in accordance with SS
635.16.01 Payment – Payment for 25 mm WELL Drawings SP635-2.1.1 through SP635-2.1.14, and SP635-
GRADED BASE COURSE AGGREGATE will be at the 2.2.1 through SP635-2.2.10.
Contract Unit Price per cubic metre.
Where specified, luminaire poles shall be mounted on
The Unit Price shall include all costs of the supply, hauling, frangible or breakaway bases in accordance with SS
placing, trimming and compacting the material, and all Drawings SP635-2.1.15 and 2.1.16.
other labour and equipment necessary to complete the
Sign poles shall be installed in accordance with SS
installation.
Drawings SP635-3.1.1 through SP635-3.1.22.
Where the 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate
Poles shall not be erected until concrete bases have attained
material is used to backfill a conduit trench, its volume shall
a strength of 30 MPa.
be calculated in place using:
Push button and signal head locations shall be verified with
(a) The actual length of trench from which the material is
the Drawings, before poles are drilled and assembled.
designated unacceptable;
Field drilling of holes larger than 33 mm (1 5/16") diameter
(b) a 450 mm wide trench; and
will not be permitted in Type 1, 3, 6, 7, L, M and H shafts,
(c) the actual depth of this material compacted in place. and all arms and extensions. Where larger holes are
required, the holes shall be reinforced with a welded
Where 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate
bushing in accordance with SS Drawing SP635-2.4.17.
material is used to backfill bases, junction boxes, vaults, or
other work the volume will be calculated by the actual All components of the luminaire, signal and sign poles shall
compacted volume of material installed in the excavation be handled with care to prevent stress to the components
less the volume of the item installed in the excavation. through bending or twisting. A nylon sling shall be used to
transport and erect the components. The use of steel chains
635.17 Removal of Rejected Excavated Material – Where
as slings will not be permitted. Any damage to the
excavated material is designated unacceptable for backfill
components through overstress, scratching or denting shall
by the Ministry Representative it shall be removed from the
be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense to the
work site and disposed of by the Contractor.
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
The disposal site shall be approved by the Ministry
All pole shafts shall be installed plumb. Where possible, all
Representative.
luminaire poles shall be positioned with the hand-hole
635.17.01 Payment – Payment for the REMOVAL OF oriented opposite the road and if not possible, on the
REJECTED EXCAVATED MATERIAL will be at the downstream traffic side.
Contract Unit Price per cubic metre.
All wiring inside the poles shall be in accordance with
The Unit Price shall include all costs of removal and SS 635.21.
disposal, and all other labour, equipment and materials
Pole shafts shall mount directly on concrete bases and,
necessary to complete the removal of rejected material.
where necessary, shall be trued to plumb using levelling
Where the rejected material has been excavated from a shims.
conduit trench, its volume shall be calculated in place using:
The Contractor shall tighten all bolts and nuts to 1/3 rotation
(a) The actual length of trench from which the material is past snug tight. "Snug-tight" is the tightness attained by a
designated unacceptable; few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a
person using a spud wrench.
(b) a 450 mm wide trench; and
All scratches in poles and all field drilled holes shall be
(c) the actual depth of material removed.
coated with cold galvanizing compound as per SS 635.25.
Where the rejected material has been excavated for bases, Hand hole bolts shall be coated with anti-seize lubricant.
junction boxes, vaults or other work the volume will be
calculated by the actual volume of excavated material less 635.19.01 Traffic and Pedestrian Signal Heads – Traffic
the volume of the item installed in the excavation. and pedestrian signal heads shall be installed in accordance
with SS Drawings SP635-2.3.1 through SP635-2.3.7 and -
635.18 Restoration – Areas where work has been
SP635-2.3.10.
performed shall be returned to their original condition and
must be left in a neat state to the satisfaction of the Ministry All traffic and pedestrian signal heads and mounting
Representative. All costs for restoration will be considered hardware shall be securely attached to the pole.
incidental to the Work.

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (10 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 23 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

The Contractor shall aim all traffic signal heads in 635.19.08 Video Detection Equipment – Video Detection
accordance with SS Drawing SP635-2.3.11. Pedestrian equipment shall be installed in accordance with the
signal heads shall be aimed to line up with the opposing Drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. The cameras
wheelchair ramp or centre of the crosswalk. shall be installed on signal arms or on special combination
Type 2A luminaire / camera arms in accordance with SS
Traffic and pedestrian signal heads shall be aimed in the
Drawings SP635-2.3.12 and SP635-2.3.13. The Contractor
field to the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
shall undertake all commissioning and set-up of the
All traffic and pedestrian signal heads shall have LED (light equipment under the direction of the supplier technical
emitting diode) traffic signal heads unless noted otherwise representative.
on the Drawings.
635.19.09 Payment – Payment for the installation of each
The Contractor shall completely cover all traffic and SIGNAL POLE will be at the Lump Sum Price for that pole.
pedestrian signal heads with dark coloured pre-
The Lump Sum Price shall include all costs for the
manufactured signal cover bags from the time they are
installation of traffic signal poles and arms, traffic signal
installed until the system is required by the Ministry.
heads including mounting hardware, pedestrian pushbuttons
635.19.02 Pedestrian Pushbuttons and Signs – Pedestrian and signs, luminaires and photocells, audible signals, street
pushbuttons and signs shall be installed in accordance with name signs, small overhead signs, and fire indication lights;
SS Drawing SP635-2.3.8 and SP635-2.3.14. supply and installation of wiring to the handhole at the base
of the pole, fuse holders, fuses and splices; and all other
Pedestrian push buttons and signs shall be securely attached labour, equipment and material necessary to complete the
to the pole. Pedestrian pushbutton signs shall be installation.
temporarily covered until the signal is in operation.
635.19.10 Payment – Payment for the installation of
635.19.03 Luminaires and Photocells – Luminaires and
LUMINAIRE POLES will be at the Unit Price for each
photocells shall be installed as per manufacturer's
pole.
instructions or as noted on the Drawings. Luminaires shall
be installed level. The Unit Price shall include all costs for the installation of
luminaire poles, luminaires and photocells, and frangible or
Roadway luminaires shall be oriented parallel to the breakaway bases; supply and installation of wiring to the
roadway surface to reduce glare. handhole at the base of the pole, fuse holders, fuses and
Sign luminaires are typically no longer used. If specified, splices; and all other labour, equipment and materials
sign luminaires will require different aiming depending on necessary to complete the installation.
the manufacturer. Aiming angles shall be noted on the
635.19.11 Payment – Payment for the supply and
Drawings or shall be requested from the Ministry installation of EMERGENCY VEHICLE PRE-EMPTION
Representative. EQUIPMENT will be made at the Lump Sum Price for each
Photocell eyes shall be aimed north. signal.
635.19.04 Street name Signs – Street name signs shall be The Lump Sum Price shall include all costs for the
bolted directly to the pole arms in accordance with SS installation of the pre-emption equipment, commissioning,
Drawing SP635-3.2.1. set-up and adjusting.
635.19.05 Audible Signals – Audible Signals shall be 635.19.12 Payment – Payment for the supply and
installed on pedestrian signal heads in accordance with SS installation of VIDEO DETECTION EQUIPMENT will be
Drawing SP635-2.3.9. The Contractor shall aim and adjust made at the Lump Sum Price for each signal.
the audible signal heads to the satisfaction of the Ministry
The Lump Sum Price shall include all costs for the supply
Representative.
and installation of the video detection equipment,
635.19.06 Emergency Vehicle Pre-emption Equipment – commissioning, set-up and adjusting.
Emergency vehicle pre-emption equipment shall be 635.20 Service Equipment – Service equipment shall be
installed in accordance with the Drawings and
installed in accordance with SS Drawings SP635-2.4.1
manufacturer’s instructions. The Contractor shall undertake
through SP635-2.4.20.
all commissioning and set-up of the equipment under the
direction of the supplier’s technical representative. Service Equipment shall include electrical panels and
telephone demarcation panels.
635.19.07 Small Overhead Signs – Small overhead signs
are classed as signs 1200 mm x 900 mm or smaller. Small Specialized service equipment (e.g., service kiosks) shall be
overhead signs shall be installed in accordance with SS installed in accordance with the Drawings and Special
Drawings SP635-3.2.2 through SP635-3.2.6. Provisions.
Sign installations shall meet the requirements of SS 635.34. Service equipment shall be securely attached to the poles.

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (11 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 24 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

635.20.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of All wiring shall be neatly bundled and labelled in all
SERVICE EQUIPMENT will be at the Lump Sum Price for junction boxes, vaults, traffic controllers, handholes at pole
that service area. bases, and service panels.
The Lump Sum Price shall include all costs for the supply Sealing of connections shall be performed using one of the
and installation of electrical service, distribution and following methods:
disconnect panels and telephone demarcation panels
(a) Double dipping using 3M "Scotchcote" or approved
including the pole where a separate service pole is required;
alternate. Dipping shall be performed strictly adhering
supply and installation of service wiring including wiring
to the manufacturer's specifications.
between the disconnect and distribution panels; supply and
installation of rigid metal conduit, fittings, mounting (b) Each conductor shall have a wrap of the self-holding
hardware, ground wire, ground clamp, insulating clevis, tape (3M Linerless Rubber Splicing Tape, Steadfast 8
ground plate and branch circuit wiring to the handhole at the Ounce Splicing tape or approved alternate), then the
base of the pole; supply and installation of a working pad complete splice shall be wrapped. PVC tape shall then
including additional fill as required (see SS Drawing be applied to cover the complete splice.
SP635-2.4.20); and all other labour, equipment and
If conductor connections require the use of split bolts or
materials necessary to complete the installation.
similar style devices due to wire size, then the splice shall
635.21 Wiring – All wiring shall be installed in accordance be completely covered with Duct Seal to form a ball over
with the Drawings or as directed by the Ministry the connection. This Duct Seal shall be thick enough to
Representative. prevent sharp ends of the conductors and/or points of the
connector from protruding through the taped connection.
All conductors shall be stranded copper, RW90 XLPE
Once the duct seal has been applied, the splice shall be taped
insulated unless otherwise noted.
with self-holding and PVC tape as described in
Conductor gauges (AWG) shall be as specified on the SS 635.21(b).
Drawings.
All luminaires and signal heads shall be bonded with a No.
Shielded detector loop and telephone demarcation cables 12 RW90 conductor. Steel junction box lids and steel vault
shall be 2 conductor No. 18 Ministry pre-approved product. lids shall be bonded in accordance with SS Drawings
Shielded detector loop cables shall run continuous with no SP635-2.5.1 through SP635-2.5.5.
splices, from the traffic controller (or other type of control
635.21.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of
equipment) to the respective detector loop conductor.
WIRING will be at the Lump Sum Price for all underground
Single conductor colour coding and labelling is required and wiring included in the Work.
shall be as noted on SS Drawings SP635-2.5.7 and 2.5.8.
The Lump Sum Price shall include all costs for the supply
Conductor colour coding shall also meet the requirements
and installation of wiring and cables located in the
of the Canadian Electrical Code.
underground conduit system (unless otherwise noted) and
Where specifically noted on the Drawings signal cable shall splices; labelling of underground conductors; and all other
be used. Signal cable colour coding and conductor labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete the
designations shall be as noted on SS Drawing SP635-2.5.9. installation.
Where signal cable is used all conductor splices shall be
635.22 Traffic Counter Stations – Traffic counter stations
made in pole hand holes in accordance with SS Drawing
shall be short-duration type or permanent type.
SP635-2.5.10.
Short duration traffic counter stations shall be constructed
Each traffic and pedestrian signal head section and
as noted on the Drawings and shall be installed in
luminaire shall be wired separately to the base of the pole.
accordance with SS Drawing SP635-2.6.1.
A separate neutral and bond conductor shall run to each
signal head and luminaire from the base of the pole. The Perforated square steel tubing shall conform to SS 635.30.
neutral and bond conductors shall be bundled with the
Permanent traffic counter stations shall be constructed as
feeder circuits.
noted on the Drawings and shall be installed in accordance
Luminaire conductor wiring and fusing in pole handholes with SS Drawing SP635-2.6.2 and 2.6.3.
shall conform to SS Drawing SP635-2.5.6.
The Contractor will install all pole mount cabinets. The
Wiring inside junction boxes and vaults shall conform to SS Ministry Electrical Maintenance Contractor will connect all
Drawings SP635-2.5.1 through SP635-2.5.5. field wiring in cabinets, trouble-shoot problems in the
cabinet and undertake all equipment set-up.
Conductor splices shall be secured with solderless
"Marrette" type connectors. Where the number and/or size 635.22.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of
of conductors exceed the capacity of the Marrette, split bolt TRAFFIC COUNTER STATIONS will be at the Unit Price
connectors shall be used. per traffic counter station.

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (12 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 25 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

The Unit Price shall include all costs for the supply and The Unit Price shall include all costs for layout of the loop,
installation of perforated steel tubing, above ground conduit asphalt cutting and preparation of pavement cuts; supply
and junction boxes, connectors; supply and installation of and installation of loop conductors or preformed loops as
rigid metal conduits, fittings, mounting hardware and applicable, to the underground junction box, traffic counter
branch circuit wiring to the handhole at the base of pole for post or cabinet; supply and installation of backer rod, sand
pole mount cabinets; installation of counter cabinet and loop sealant; and all other labour, equipment and
including the pole where a separate pole is required; Supply materials necessary to complete the installation.
and installation of W-55 signs and concrete pad in front of
635.25 Repairing Galvanized Surfaces – Any spots where
the controller door; and all other labour, equipment and
the galvanized finish is damaged due to drilling, tapping,
materials necessary to complete the installation.
reaming or welding and any surface damage incurred during
635.23 Controllers – Type B, C, M, S and P6 traffic transportation and erection shall be refinished with cold
controller cabinets shall be installed in accordance with SS galvanizing compound. Cold galvanizing compound shall
Drawings SP635-2.7.1 through SP635-2.7.4. be selected from the Ministry Recognized Products List
under the category ‘Additional Paint Coatings – Zinc Rich
The Ministry Electrical Maintenance Contractor will install
Touch-up Paints and Primers’. The application of cold
all base mount traffic controllers and cabinets. The
galvanizing compound shall conform to the Manufacturer's
Contractor will install all pole mount cabinets. The
instructions, ‘Notes for Use’ on the Recognized Products
Ministry Electrical Maintenance Contractor will connect all
List, and the following:
field wiring in controller cabinets, trouble-shoot problems
in the cabinet, enter all signal timings, undertake (a) The surface shall be mechanically cleaned with a wire
modifications to existing signal phasing and timings, start- brush or grinder and chemically cleaned to remove all
up controller and complete Ministry signal turn-on sheets. welding flux, paint, grease, oil, rust, scale or other
detrimental foreign matter.
The Contractor shall be on hand to assist with controller
start-up and make any repairs to field wiring or hardware as (b) The surface shall be absolutely dry and the ambient
required. The Contractor shall provide traffic control and temperature shall be over 10°C.
assistance during the controller start-up.
(c) Uniform coats shall be applied. Each coat shall be as
The Contractor shall coil and label 2 m of each conductor thick as possible without causing runs on the finished
inside the traffic controller for connections by the Ministry surface.
Electrical Maintenance Contractor. The Contractor shall
All costs for the repair of galvanized surfaces will be
verify that all traffic and pedestrian signal phases are wired
considered incidental to the Work.
as shown on the Drawings and that all circuits are tested
prior to activation. The Contractor shall verify that all 635.26 Flasher Luminaires – Flasher luminaires shall be
signal and pedestrian phases are properly colour coded and mounted on perforated square steel tubing in accordance
labelled with identification tags. with SS Drawings SP635-2.9.1 through SP635-2.9.3.
635.23.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of each Flasher luminaires shall be mounted on poles in accordance
CONTROLLER will be at the Lump Sum Price for that with SS Drawings SP635-2.9.4 through SP635-2.9.6.
controller.
All perforated square steel tubing shall be in accordance
The Lump Sum Price shall include all costs for the with SS 635.30.
installation of pole mount cabinets and installation of the
635.26.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of
pole where a separate pole is required, rigid metal conduits,
Flasher Luminaires on Perforated Square Steel Tubing will
fittings, mounting hardware and branch circuit wiring to the
be at the Unit Price for a one or two sign unit.
handhole at the base of pole for pole mount cabinets; testing
of all circuits; labelling of all conductors; traffic control and The Unit Price shall include all costs for the supply and
all other labour, equipment and materials necessary to installation of perforated square steel tubing, mounting
complete the installation. hardware, wiring to the junction box nearest to the flasher
post, ty-raps and connectors, signs, flasher luminaires,
635.24 Detector Loops – Detector loops shall be
lamps; and all other labour, equipment and materials
constructed as noted on the Drawings and shall be installed
necessary to complete the installation.
in accordance with SS Drawings SP635-2.8.1 through
SP635-2.8.17. Loop check sheets shall be completed and 635.26.02 Payment – Payment for the installation of
submitted to the Ministry Representative prior to signal Flasher Luminaires on Poles will be at the Unit Price for
start-up. each item.
635.24.01 Payment – Payment for DETECTOR LOOPS The Unit Price shall include all costs for the supply and
will be at the Unit Price per loop. installation of all fittings, hardware and wiring to the
underground junction box nearest the pole, signs, flasher

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (13 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 26 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

luminaires and lamps; and all other labour, equipment and 635.28 Breakaway Sign Structures – Breakaway sign
materials necessary to complete the installation. structures shall be installed in accordance with SS Drawings
SP635-3.4.1 through SP635-3.4.10.
PART D – SIGNING
After concrete bases are installed, the Contractor shall
Note: Removal of existing signs shall be in accordance with
survey the finished base elevations to determine the correct
SS 200.
leg lengths. The fabricator shall cut legs to the correct
635.27 Overhead Signs – Overhead signs are categorized lengths.
in two classes:
Legs and columns are to be transported in an unstressed
• small overhead signs are 1200 mm x 900 mm or manner.
smaller and made from sheet aluminium; Breakaway structures shall be installed with the legs and
• large overhead signs are larger than 1200 mm x columns plumb, and the battens and signs level.
900 mm and made from sheet aluminum or The Contractor shall tighten all bolts and nuts with a torque
extruded aluminum. wrench to the torque specified on the Drawings.
Note: Signs are no longer made from plywood. Signs shall be sheet aluminum or extruded aluminum, as
Small overhead signs are generally mounted on signal poles specified.
and shall be installed in accordance with SS Drawings Extruded aluminum signs shall be installed in accordance
SP635-3.2.2 through SP635-3.2.6. with SS Drawings SP635-3.4.7 through SP635-3.4.10 and
Large overhead sheet aluminum signs are installed on sign SS 635.34.
poles in accordance with SS Drawings SP635-3.3.1 through Extruded aluminum signs on breakaway sign structures
3.3.4, unless otherwise noted. Large overhead extruded shall not be illuminated.
aluminum signs are installed on sign poles in accordance
with SS Drawings SP635-3.3.5 through SP635-3.3.15, and All sign installations shall be in accordance with SS 635.34.
3.3.18 unless otherwise noted. Sign poles shall be installed 635.28.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of each
in accordance with SS Drawings SP635-3.1.1 through BREAKAWAY SIGN STRUCTURE will be at the Lump
SP635-3.1.22. Sum Price for that breakaway sign structure.
Sign lighting is used only when specified by the Ministry. The Lump Sum Price shall include all costs for the
If specified, it shall be installed in accordance with SS installation of breakaway sign legs, columns, stub posts,
Drawing SP635-3.3.2 and 3.3.16 and SS 635.19.03. fuse and connection joints, sign or signs, sign luminaires
Overhead signs shall be securely installed on sign pole and mounting brackets, battens, painting (where required),
structures. sign mounting bolts and hardware for signs; and all other
labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete the
All horizontal supports and signs shall be level and vertical installation.
supports plumb.
635.29 Wood Post Sign Structures – Wood post sign
Sign Poles shall be installed in accordance with SS 635.19. structures shall be installed in accordance with SS Drawings
Advance warning signs shall be extruded aluminum and SP635-3.5.1 through SP635-3.5.9.
shall be installed in accordance with SS Drawings SP635- Excavations for wood posts shall be wide enough to allow
3.3.5 through SP635-3.3.8. for proper compaction of backfill around the wood posts.
All signs shall be installed in accordance with SS 635.34. Wood posts shall be embedded in the ground to the depths
indicated on SS Drawings SP635-3.5.1 through SP635-
635.27.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of each 3.5.3.
OVERHEAD SIGN POLE will be at the Lump Sum Price
for that sign pole. Wood post excavations shall be backfilled using the
excavated material except where excavated material is ruled
The Lump Sum Price shall include all costs for installation unacceptable by the Ministry Representative. Where new
of sign poles and arms, overhead signs complete with T material is required, 25 mm Well Graded Base Course
Section mounting brackets and clips, advance warning Aggregate material shall be used as specified in SS 635.16.
flasher equipment, sign luminaries and mounting hardware; Unacceptable materials shall be disposed of as specified in
small overhead signs and mounting brackets, wiring to the SS 635.17.
handhole at the base of the pole, fuse holders, fuses, junction
boxes on pole arms, splices; and all other labour, equipment Wood posts shall be Douglas Fir/Larch, No. 1 Grade or
and materials necessary to complete the installation. pressure treated, surfaced four sides, and shall be supplied
in complete lengths without splices. Posts shall be straight
Where small overhead signs are installed on signal poles, and free of cracks.
payment will be made under SS 635.19.09.

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (14 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 27 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

All wood products used in wood sign post structures shall and all other labour, equipment and materials necessary to
be preservative treated and meet the requirements of SS complete the installation.
908.
Payment for excavation of Type A material (solid rock) and
Wood posts shall be installed plumb and at the proper offset de-watering of excavations will be made in accordance with
and elevation. GC 38.00 Changes to Work.
Backfill material shall be placed in layers not exceeding Where excavated material is ruled unacceptable for backfill,
150 mm compacted thickness and shall be compacted to a payment for 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate
minimum 100% of the Standard Proctor maximum dry will be made under SS 635.16.01.
density obtained by ASTM D698. Layer thickness and
635.30 Perforated Square Steel Sign Post Structures –
moisture content of the material shall be adjusted as
Perforated Square Steel Sign Post shall be supplied in
necessary to achieve compaction.
accordance with SS Drawings SP635-3.6.1 through
All areas excavated and backfilled shall be restored to their SP635-6.4.
original condition.
Sign posts shall be perforated square steel tubing. The
Signs on single wood post structures shall be sheet perforated square steel tubing will be required in different
aluminum and shall be installed in accordance with SS outside dimensions as noted on the Drawings. The
Drawing SP635-3.5.1 and SS 635.34. perforated square steel tubing shall be formed from
12 gauge hot rolled steel, conforming to ASTM A1011
Signs on multiple wood post structures shall be sheet
Grade 50 The tubing shall be hot dipped galvanized
aluminum or extruded aluminum.
conforming to ASTM A653 Designation G-90 or CSA
Extruded aluminum signs shall be installed in accordance G164. Steel tubing shall have 7/16" holes on all four sides
with SS Drawings SP635-3.5.6 through SP635-3.5.9 and at 1" centres.
SS 635.34.
Galvanized perforated square steel tubing shall be supplied
All areas around the post shall be fully restored to their in continuous lengths, with no splices, and shall be field cut
original condition. to suit the installation. All field cuts shall be painted with
cold galvanizing compound in accordance with SS 635.25.
635.29.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of
SINGLE WOOD POST SIGN STRUCTURES will be at Perforated square steel tubing sign posts shall be installed
the Unit Price for each wood post sign structure. on concrete bases or direct buried in accordance with SS
Drawing SP635-3.6.1
The Unit Price shall include all costs of Type D excavation,
other than concrete or asphalt removal; supply and Perforated square steel tubing posts shall be installed plumb.
installation of wood posts, painting (where required), sign
Signs installed on single or double perforated square steel
mounting bolts and hardware and signs; placing and
sign posts shall be sheet aluminum. Sheet aluminum signs
compaction of excavated materials as backfill; removal of
shall be installed in accordance with SS Drawings SP635-
excess excavated material; restoration; and all other labour,
3.6.1 through SP635-3.6.4 and SS 635.34.
equipment and materials necessary to complete the
installation. 635.30.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of
SINGLE PERFORATED SQUARE STEEL SIGN POST
Payment for excavation of Type A material (solid rock) and
STRUCTURES will be at the Unit Price for each structure.
de-watering of excavations will be made in accordance with
GC 38.00 Changes to Work. The Unit Price shall include all costs for the supply and
installation of perforated square steel tubing, mounting
Where excavated material is ruled unacceptable for backfill,
hardware, sign(s); and all other labour, equipment and
payment for 25 mm Well Graded Base Course Aggregate
materials necessary to complete the installation.
will be made under SS 635.16.01.
635.30.02 Payment – Payment for DOUBLE
635.29.02 Payment – Payment for the installation of each
PERFORATED SQUARE STEEL SIGN POST
MULTI POST WOOD POST SIGN STRUCTURE will be
STRUCTURES will be at the Unit Price for each sign
at the Lump Sum Price for that wood post sign structure.
structure.
The Lump Sum Price shall include all costs of Type D
The Unit Price shall include all costs for the supply and
excavation, other than concrete or asphalt removal; supply
installation of perforated square steel tubing; mounting
and installation of wood posts, painting (where required),
hardware, sign(s); and all other labour, equipment and
sign mounting bolts and hardware, battens for signs, sign(s)
materials necessary to complete the installation.
and aluminum angle sign supports for extruded aluminum
signs; placing and compaction of excavated materials as 635.31 Round Steel Sign Post Structures – Round Steel
backfill; removal of excess excavated material; restoration sign posts shall be installed in accordance with SS Drawings
SP635-3.8.1 through SP635-3.8.3.

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (15 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 28 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

Barrier sign posts shall be mounted on barrier stands, which Where plastic delineators are specified, they shall be a
shall be securely bolted to concrete roadside or concrete Ministry preapproved type and shall be installed in
median barriers. accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and SS
Drawing SP635-3.10.4.
Posts and pipe sleeves shall be round Schedule 40 steel pipe
conforming to ASTM A53, Grade A or B, Type E or S. The Delineator post excavation, backfill, type of wood, painting
pipe shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with CSA (where required) and installation methods shall be in
G164. Pipe shall be field cut to lengths to suit sign accordance with SS 635.29.
mounting heights as noted on the Drawings or as directed
Perforated square steel tubing shall be in accordance with
by the Ministry Representative. All field cuts in galvanized
SS 635.30.
steel pipes shall be coated with cold galvanizing compound
in accordance with SS 635.25. All holes drilled in galvanized surfaces shall be coated with
cold galvanizing compound in accordance with SS 635.25.
Signs shall be installed in accordance with SS 635.34.
635.33.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of
635.31.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of
DELINEATORS will be at the Unit Price for each
ROUND STEEL SIGN POST STRUCTURES will be at the
delineator.
Unit Price for each sign post.
The Unit Price shall include all costs of excavation, other
The Unit Price shall include all costs for the supply and
than concrete or asphalt removal; supply and installation of
installation of sign or signs and barrier stands, sign posts and
delineator posts and mounting hardware, W-055
mounting hardware, breakaway devices, where warranted,
background plate and reflectors for perforated sign posts
pipe sleeves including trenching and backfilling where posts
and W-055 reflectors for wood sign posts; placing and
are installed in concrete sidewalks; and all other labour,
compaction of excavated materials as backfill; removal of
equipment and materials necessary to complete the
excess excavated materials; and all other labour, equipment
installation.
and materials necessary to complete the installation.
635.32 Sign Mounting on the Side of Poles – Signs
635.34 Signs – Signs smaller than 1200 mm x 900 mm shall
mounted on the side of steel poles shall be installed in
be sheet aluminum. Signs 1200 mm x 900 mm or larger
accordance with SS Drawing SP635-3.9.1.
shall be extruded aluminum.
Signs shall be securely attached to poles.
All sign installations shall meet the requirements of the most
Signs shall be installed in accordance with SS 635.34. current edition of the Ministry Manual of Standard Traffic
Signs and Pavement Markings available at:
Holes drilled in galvanized steel poles shall be coated with
cold galvanizing compound in accordance with SS 635.25. https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tra
nsportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
635.32.01 Payment – Payment for the installation of SIGN
guidelines/traffic-engineering-safety/traffic-signs-
INSTALLATION ON THE SIDE OF POLES will be at the
markings
Unit Price for signs installed on each pole.
The Contractor shall have a current copy of this document
The Unit Price shall include all costs for the supply and
on site when installing signs.
installation of signs, sign mounting hardware; and all other
labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete the Signs shall be completely covered with a suitable grade of
installation. polyethylene sheeting from the time they are installed until
the roadway is in full operation, unless otherwise directed
Where multiple signs are to be installed on a pole only one
by the Ministry Representative. The polyethylene sheeting
unit item will be paid.
material shall prevent sign messages from being visible.
635.33 Delineators – Delineators shall be wood, perforated
Signs shall be handled so as not to damage them in any way.
steel tubing or plastic as noted on the Drawings or as
Slip sheets between signs shall be removed carefully to
directed by the Ministry Representative.
avoid damage due to adhesion of the slip sheet to the sign.
Wood delineator posts shall be installed in accordance with Signs shall be stored on end on dunnage or racks in a dry,
Drawing SP635-3.10.1. covered area, protected from damage. Damaged signs shall
be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.
Perforated square steel tubing delineator posts shall be
Taping, screwing, nailing, gluing, bolting or stapling to sign
installed in accordance with SS Drawing SP635-3.10.2.
faces or back is prohibited unless otherwise noted.
Where delineators are mounted on a pole, sign post or The Contractor shall confirm that signs have the correct
structure, they shall be installed in accordance with SS messaging. The Contractor shall verify that signs are free
Drawing SP635-3.10.3. of cracks, dents or warpage prior to installation. Any flaws

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (16 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 29 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

with the sign shall be immediately reported to the Ministry Patching material shall meet current Ministry
Representative prior to installation. Specifications.
Signs shall be bolted to the mounting hardware or structure Custom sheet aluminum and extruded aluminum signs will
as indicated on the applicable Drawings. The sign panels be identified with their sign numbers labelled on the back.
shall be tightened to eliminate sign movement but not over
The Contractor shall maintain all signs installed as part of
tightened so as to recess the bolt heads into the sign face.
the work within the project area for the duration of the
Sheet aluminum signs larger than 1200 mm x 3000 mm will Work. Maintenance shall be performed for the duration of
consist of multiple panels. Each panel shall be correctly the work in accordance with the following:
aligned so that no gaps exist between sign panels. The
(a) Sign maintenance shall include the straightening,
bottom of the sign panel shall be installed level.
replacing, repairing, and cleaning of all signs installed
Sheet aluminum exit number tabs shall attach to extruded as part of the Work. Sign maintenance shall be at the
aluminum signs in accordance with SS Drawings SP 635- discretion of the Ministry Representative.
3.7.1.
(b) The Contractor shall regularly inspect the signs to
Extruded aluminum signs will be supplied unassembled. ensure consistent maintenance for maximum visibility.
Aluminum sign sections shall be assembled and correctly
(c) Where directed by the Ministry Representative the
aligned to the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
Contractor shall clean the signs by power washing or
Extruded aluminum signs are supplied in typical widths steam cleaning using pressures not exceeding 7 MPa
shown on SS Drawing SP635-3.3.11. and temperatures not exceeding 65°C. Chemical
washing of sign faces is not permitted.
Extruded aluminum exit number tabs shall attach to
extruded aluminum signs in accordance with SS Drawings All costs for installation and maintenance of signs shall be
SP635-3.7.2 and SP635-3.7.3. included in the prices for the applicable items.

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (17 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 30 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (18 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 31 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (19 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 32 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (20 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 33 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (21 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 34 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (22 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 35 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (23 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 36 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (24 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 37 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (25 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 38 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (26 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 39 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (27 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 40 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (28 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 41 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (29 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 42 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (30 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 43 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (31 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 44 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (32 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 45 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (33 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 46 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (34 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 47 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (35 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 48 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (36 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 49 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (37 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 50 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (38 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 51 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (39 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 52 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (40 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 53 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (41 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 54 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (42 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 55 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (43 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 56 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (44 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 57 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (45 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 58 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (46 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 59 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (47 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 60 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (48 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 61 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (49 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 62 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (50 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 63 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (51 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 64 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (52 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 65 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (53 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 66 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (54 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 67 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (55 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 68 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (56 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 69 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (57 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 70 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (58 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 71 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (59 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 72 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (60 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 73 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (61 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 74 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (62 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 75 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (63 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 76 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (64 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 77 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (65 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 78 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (66 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 79 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (67 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 80 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (68 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 81 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (69 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 82 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (70 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 83 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (71 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 84 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (72 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 85 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (73 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 86 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (74 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 87 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (75 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 88 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (76 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 89 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (77 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 90 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (78 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 91 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (79 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 92 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (80 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 93 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (81 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 94 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (82 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 95 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (83 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 96 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (84 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 97 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (85 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 98 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (86 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 99 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (87 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 100 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (88 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 101 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (89 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 102 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (90 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 103 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (91 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 104 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (92 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 105 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (93 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 106 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (94 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 107 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (95 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 108 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (96 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 109 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (97 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 110 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (98 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 111 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (99 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 112 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (100 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 113 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (101 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 114 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (102 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 115 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (103 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 116 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (104 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 117 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (105 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 118 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (106 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 119 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (107 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 120 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (108 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 121 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (109 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 122 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (110 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 123 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (111 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 124 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (112 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 125 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (113 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 126 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (114 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 127 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (115 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 128 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (116 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 129 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (117 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 130 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (118 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 131 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (119 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 132 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (120 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 133 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (121 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 134 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (122 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 135 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (123 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 136 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (124 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 137 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (125 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 138 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (126 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 139 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (127 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 140 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (128 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 141 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (129 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 142 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (130 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 143 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (131 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 144 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (132 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 145 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (133 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 146 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (134 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 147 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (135 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 148 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (136 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 149 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (137 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 150 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (138 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 151 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (139 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 152 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (140 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 153 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (141 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 154 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (142 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 155 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (143 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 156 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (144 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 157 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (145 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 158 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (146 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 159 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (147 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 160 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (148 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 161 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (149 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 162 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (150 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 163 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (151 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 164 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (152 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 165 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (153 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 166 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (154 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 167 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (155 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 168 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (156 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 169 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (157 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 170 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (158 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 171 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (159 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 172 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (160 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 173 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (161 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 174 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (162 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 175 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (163 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 176 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (164 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 177 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (165 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 178 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (166 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 179 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (167 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 180 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (168 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 181 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (169 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 182 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (170 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 183 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (171 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 184 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (172 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 185 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (173 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 186 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (174 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 187 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (175 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 188 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (176 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 189 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (177 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 190 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (178 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 191 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (179 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 192 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (180 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 193 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (181 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 194 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (182 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 195 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (183 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 196 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (184 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 197 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (185 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 198 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (186 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 199 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (187 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 200 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (188 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 201 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (189 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 202 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (190 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 203 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (191 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 204 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (192 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 205 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (193 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 206 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (194 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 207 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (195 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 208 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (196 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 209 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (197 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 210 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (198 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 211 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (199 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 212 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (200 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 213 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (201 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 214 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (202 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 215 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (203 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 216 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (204 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 217 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (205 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 218 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (206 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 219 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (207 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 220 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (208 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 221 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (209 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 222 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (210 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 223 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (211 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 224 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (212 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 225 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (213 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 226 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (214 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 227 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (215 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 228 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (216 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 229 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (217 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 230 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (218 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 231 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (219 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 232 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (220 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 233 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (221 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 234 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (222 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 235 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (223 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 236 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (224 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 237 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (225 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 238 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (226 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 239 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (227 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 240 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (228 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 241 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (229 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 242 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (230 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 243 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (231 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 244 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (232 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 245 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (233 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 246 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (234 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 247 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (235 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 248 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (236 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 249 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (237 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 250 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (238 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 251 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (239 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 252 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (240 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 253 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (241 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 254 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (242 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 255 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (243 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 256 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (244 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 257 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (245 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 258 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (246 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 259 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (247 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 260 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (248 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 261 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (249 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 262 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (250 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 263 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (251 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 264 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (252 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 265 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (253 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 266 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (254 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 267 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (255 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 268 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (256 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 269 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (257 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 270 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (258 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 271 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (259 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 272 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (260 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 273 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (261 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 274 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (262 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 275 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (263 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 276 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (264 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 277 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (265 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 278 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (266 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 279 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (267 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 280 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (268 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 281 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (269 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 282 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (270 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 283 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (271 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 284 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (272 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 285 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (273 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 286 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (274 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 287 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (275 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 288 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (276 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 289 of 452
SECTION 635 ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING

BC MoTI SS 2020 635 (277 of 277)


Vol. 2 Page 290 of 452
SECTION 700

WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

DESCRIPTION 700.11.02 Posts


700.01 Scope – This Section covers the construction of (a) Round Wood Post Material – Treated Round Wood
wildlife exclusion fencing with galvanized wire mesh, posts shall be prepared from straight peeled Jack Pine
pressure treated wood posts and/or galvanized steel posts, or Lodgepole Pine.
one-way gates, lockable human access gates and double (b) Dimensional Tolerances – In addition to the
swing gates and, with reference to SS Drawings of the requirements in SS 909, treated round wood posts shall
SP700 series, is intended to specify acceptable standards have the following dimensions, each within a 2%
and some optional features as may be required by the tolerance:
Special Provisions.
(i) Length shall be 4300 mm or as necessary to
Alternative construction may be called for by the Drawings, comply with the applicable SS 700 SP Drawings,
the Special Provisions or instructions of the Ministry for the fence type specified and the soil type
Representative, and alternative methods may be acceptable encountered;
upon submission to the Ministry Representative.
(ii) minimum tip diameter of 150 mm; and
(iii) maximum butt diameter of 200 mm.
MATERIALS
(c) Bottom Tapers – The bottoms of the round wood posts
700.10 Post Type – Posts may be wood or steel, except that must be tapered to a rounded end for driveability.
steel posts shall be used:
700.13 Steel Posts and Steel Components – All steel posts
• where it is not possible to attain the required and steel components shall be hot-dipped galvanized in
embedment for wood posts, such as where bedrock or accordance with ASTM A153 or ASTM A123, as
boulders obstruct the post hole; applicable.
• on ground slopes steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 Steel posts shall generally be Schedule 40, except shall be
vertical (34); Schedule 80 where located in wetlands, in areas frequently
under water, or in areas of soft organic soils.
• in wetlands, in areas frequently under water, or in areas
of soft organic soils; and The steel posts will not have an outside diameter less than
73 mm. The length of steel posts may vary between
• where it is determined that wood posts are unsuitable 3560 mm and 4500 mm according to installation conditions
for the existing ground conditions, topography or other as shown on the Drawings.
environmental factors.
Upon approval by the Ministry Representative, short steel
700.11 Treated Wood Materials posts may be lengthened, by a maximum of 1000 mm, by a
700.11.01 General – Wood posts, braces and other timbers welded extension. All welds shall be inspected by the
shall be supplied by the Contractor in accordance with the Ministry Representative. Welds will be ground as necessary
requirements of SS 909. to achieve a smooth, bare metal surface and immediately
coated per SS 700.14.
All wood products used in wildlife exclusion fence
construction shall be preservative treated and meet the 700.14 Touch-up Treatment for Galvanized Metal
requirements of SS 908. Surfaces – Touch-up treatment for field-damaged
galvanizing of steel posts and braces shall be two coats of
No cutting of preservative treated wood posts will be an organic, zinc rich paint selected from the Ministry’s
permitted without authorization of the Ministry Recognized Products List under the category of “Additional
Representative. Paint Coatings – Zinc-Rich Touch-up Paints and Primers
When cutting is authorized, the cut must be only at the top and applied on a thoroughly cleaned surface.
of the posts. 700.15 Fabric and Wire – The fence fabric will be 2.44 m
All cuts, holes, and superficial damage shall be field treated (8 ft) high with 150 mm (6 in) horizontal and graduated
immediately with a preservative in accordance with SS 908. vertical spacing, 12.5 gauge high tensile wire with a twisted
friction type joint at each horizontal/vertical contact point.
The fence fabric will have a minimum of 20 horizontal
wires, with graduated vertical spacing ranging from 7.62 cm
(3 inches) at the bottom to 17.78 cm (7 inches) at the top.

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (1 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 291 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

The fence fabric and wire will be galvanized in accordance materials to the height, spacing and with accessories all in
with ASTM A123, to a retention of not less than 240 g/m2. accordance with the details indicated on the Drawings,
The horizontal wires will have a minimum tensile strength Standard Specifications, and Special Provisions or to the
of 1234 MPa (179 ksi). direction of the Ministry Representative.
All wire used for braces and other use shall be galvanized All material shall be supplied by the Contractor, except
to minimum Class 3 in accordance with ASTM A641. where supply in whole or in part by the Ministry, f.o.b. the
Contractor's job site yard or Ministry's yard, is specified in
700.15.01 Fence Fabric in Confined Locations – Where
the Special Provisions.
space limitations do not permit the handling of the full
2.44 m (8 ft) section of fence, it will be permissible, where Construction shall be carried out with all labour, tools,
approved by the Ministry Representative, to use two, 1.22 m equipment and incidentals supplied by the Contractor, as
(4 ft) sections of fencing. These sections will be connected necessary, to complete all fencing work in accordance with
by galvanized steel compression hog rings every 150 mm or good work practice.
joined longitudinally with a continuous 3 mm (11 gauge)
700.21 Clearing & Grading – Prior to commencing
galvanized wire woven through the mesh and wrapped
fencing work, both sides of the fence line must be free of all
every 150 mm.
clearing and grubbing debris. All trees, other than those
700.16 One-Way Gates – Gates shown on the Drawings required by the Ministry Representative to remain, and all
shall be of the prefabricated type indicated on SS Drawings brush and other obstacles which interfere with the
SP700-12.1 to SP700-12.6 and as specified in SS 316.11 construction and maintenance of fencing and not removed
and/or in the Special Provisions. The one-way gates must by the normal clearing operations, must be removed.
be test assembled in shop, adjusted and lubricated to swing
The cleared and graded area must be a minimum of 3 m
freely without binding, and quietly shut from any position.
wide on each side of the fence to permit access for fence
All metal components of gates shall be galvanized.
repairs and maintenance, unless a lesser width is permitted
700.16.01 One-Way Gate Tines – Tines shall be fabricated by the Ministry Representative. The graded area shall have
from AISI 4140 high tensile steel to avoid animals or people a 2-5% cross-fall towards the open side of the slope to
bending them. Subsequent to cold-bending the tines, and provide drainage. No fill shall be placed in any drainage
prior to hot-dipped galvanizing, the material shall be heat path that crosses the fence line.
treated and stress relieved to achieve a Rockwell C
The ground line for the fence should be smooth and
Hardness (HRC) value of 30-35. The vertical gap between
continuous for a minimum of 1 m on both sides of the fence.
sections of tines must not exceed 200 mm. The horizontal
Minor ground undulations shall be corrected to obtain a
gap between the left and right sections of tines of the one-
smooth uniform grade, but appreciable grade depressions
way gates must not exceed 100 mm.
may be backfilled only with the permission of the Ministry
All metal in one-way gates must be galvanized. Acid bath Representative.
treatment of the tines prior to galvanization shall be
The site shall be left in a smooth and tidy condition.
controlled to minimize potential weakening of welds.
700.22 Setting Out and Connections to Existing Fences –
700.17 Lockable Human Access Gates – Gates shown on
Fence line, as shown on the Drawings, generally will be
the Drawings shall be of the prefabricated type indicated on
located a minimum of 3 m from the right-of-way boundary,
SS Drawings SP700-14.1 to SP700-14.2. The lockable
unless a lesser distance is permitted by the Ministry
human access gates must be adjusted and lubricated to
Representative.
swing and shut freely without binding in the field. Lock
assemblies must be adjusted to work in the field. All metal In areas of heavy snow, where the 10 year average total
components of gates shall be galvanized. annual snowfall is greater than 2 m, as identified in Special
Provisions, the fence line must be offset a minimum of 4 m
700.18 Double-Swing Gates – Gates shown on the
from the edge of the highway shoulder to reduce damage
Drawings shall be of the prefabricated double-swing type
from snowplows. Otherwise, the fence line must be offset
indicated on SS Drawings SP700-13.1 to SP700-13.2. The
a minimum of 3 m from the edge of the highway shoulder.
human access gates must be adjusted and lubricated to
swing and shut freely without binding in the field. Lock Post installation in fill material or minimum overburden
assemblies must be adjusted to work in the field. All metal shall be carried out according to the Ministry
components of gates shall be galvanized. Representative's directions. Where it is not possible to drive
or set wood posts to proper depth or to relocate same along
the fence line, steel fence posts as specified or, where
CONSTRUCTION permitted, multiple wood post and brace assemblies shall be
substituted.
700.20 Provision of Fencing – Fencing shall be carried out
at the locations and as shown on the Drawings with the

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (2 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 292 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

Existing fences shall be connected to new fences with posts shown on the Drawings, any part of the post embedment that
and braces for tensioning fencing wire in every direction in is excavated will be backfilled entirely with concrete.
accordance with the SP700 series of SS Drawings.
Steel posts set in organic or other soft soils shall have a total
700.23 Post Spacing – Except in areas of heavy snow, line embedment length of 1800 mm. If the post is driven, the
posts shall be spaced 5 m apart measured horizontally. It top 800 mm will be set in a concrete footing with a
will be permissible to move a post, up to 0.3 m ahead or minimum diameter of 350 mm.
back along the fence line, to avoid an obstruction preventing
Steel corner posts or brace panel posts in soft ground will
advancement of the post hole, provided that the average
also have an embedment length of 1800 mm. If the post is
spacing does not exceed 5 m.
driven, the top 1250 mm will be set in concrete footings with
In areas of heavy snow, where the 10-year average total a minimum diameter of 350 mm.
annual snowfall is greater than 2 m, as identified in Special
Any cut or abraded steel posts must be painted immediately
Provisions, the line post spacing must be reduced to 3.5 m
with metal primer paint to inhibit corrosion, according to
to reduce fence fabric sagging and tearing.
SS 700.14. Any damage to galvanized coatings must be
700.23.01 Installation of Wood Posts – Wood posts shall repaired according to SS 700.14.
be installed plumb and to a depth of 1500 mm, as indicated
Steel posts will be installed with galvanized steel post caps.
on the Drawings. Posts may be either driven or set in
excavated holes, provided that a rigid installation is Steel posts will be set to provide a rigid installation capable
achieved, capable of withstanding a horizontal load of 32 kg of withstanding a horizontal load of 32 kg (70 lb), applied
(70 lb), applied 1.5 m above the ground, in any direction in 1.5 m above the ground, in any direction in the horizontal
the horizontal plane, without any movement in excess of plane, without any movement in excess of 25 mm. The
25 mm. When a wood post is set in an excavated hole, the horizontal load test must be conducted after the post is
soil around the wood post must be compacted to the installed but before the fabric wire is attached. It is the
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative. The horizontal responsibility of the Contractor to conduct and record the
load test must be conducted after the post is installed but horizontal load test. The results of the horizontal load test
before the fabric wire is attached. It is the responsibility of must be submitted to the Ministry Representative prior to
the Contractor to conduct and record the horizontal load the fabric wire being attached.
test. The results of the horizontal load test must be
700.24 Fence Ties – Fencing shall be tied into structures,
submitted to the Ministry Representative.
gates and existing fencing as staked in the field or as
Where the slope of the terrain along the fence line directed by the Ministry Representative. Fencing ties will
approaches 1.5H:1V (34°), embedment of wood posts may at no time leave a gap greater than 100 mm.
be reduced to a minimum of 1200 mm, with permission of
the Ministry Representative. Where fence gradients are Care must be taken to ensure that the fencing ties and post
installation does not compromise the effectiveness of the
steeper than 1.5H:1V (34°), steel posts must be used, as
adjacent structures.
indicated on the Drawings.
At ungulate guards and bridges, posts may be wood or steel
700.23.02 Concrete – All concrete used as post anchorage
as permitted by the Ministry representative. Where steel
backfill shall be well-consolidated Class C concrete
conforming to SS 218 Table 218-A, or a non-shrink grout, posts are used, steel posts shall be bolted to the concrete
minimum compressive strength of 20 MPa at 28 days, abutments using 20 mm diameter galvanized or stainless
steel corrosion resistant concrete anchors that have
approved by the Ministry Representative.
manufacturer’s specifications that recommend use for
700.23.03 Installation of Steel Posts – Steel line posts, end installations in accordance with the available concrete edge
posts, corner posts and brace posts embedded in solid rock distance and that are acceptable to the Ministry
shall be set in concrete or non-shrink grout. Representative. Where wood posts are used, wood posts
shall be located as close to the abutments as possible.
Where bedrock is encountered on steep slopes (steeper than
1.5H:1V; 34°) at depths less than 1200 mm, the total 700.25 Brace Panels – Brace panels will include
embedment length may be reduced to 1000 mm. Of the intermediate brace panels, double intermediate brace panels
1000 mm, a minimum of 200 mm shall be set into the consisting of two intermediate brace panels back to back
bedrock with the remainder set in concrete footings not less and end post panels.
than 350 mm in diameter. The top surface of all concrete
footings shall be a minimum of 25 mm above ground and Brace panels shall be constructed and installed as shown on
the SS Drawings SP700-01 to SP700-02. Cross wires shall
slope away from the post to provide positive drainage as
be twisted to provide suitable tension, in the manner
indicated on the Drawings.
illustrated on the SS Drawing SP700-01.
Steel posts will be installed plumb and to the specified
Bracing wire must be galvanized and a minimum of
depth, as indicated on the Drawings. Notwithstanding,
anything to the contrary in the steel post embedment details 9.75 gauge.

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (3 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 293 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

The spacing between adjacent intermediate brace panels, only where required by the Ministry Representative, culvert
and between intermediate brace panels and end post panels, pipe will be installed at specific crossings in accordance
will not be more than 54 m, unless otherwise permitted by with the Special Provisions.
the Ministry Representative.
700.27 Connection Treatments at Structures – Fences
Intermediate brace panels shall be installed where necessary must be securely attached to walls, abutments, ungulate
to meet the foregoing requirement, and also where required guards and other structures to ensure stability of the fences
by the Ministry representative at changes in vertical or and to prevent animals from passing between the fence and
horizontal alignment. the structure. The fence must be attached as per SP700-11
using concrete anchors as per SS 700.24. Fence must be
Double brace panels will be used at corners and other sharp
securely attached to rock faces in accordance with SS
changes in the vertical or horizontal alignment, and at any
Drawing SP700-04.
other locations where they are, in the judgement of the
Ministry Representative, required to maintain the integrity 700.28 Gates – Hardware shall be securely attached to
of the fence. permit the gate to open correctly and prevent the easy
removal of the gate and hardware. Hinges shall be installed
End post panels will be installed where the fence ties in to
to permit the gate to swing back one-way against the fence.
structures or gates, at ungulate guards and at any other
Locking hardware shall be of the type specified in SS
termination of the fence. The requirement for brace panels
Drawing SP700-13.2.
at one-way wildlife gates is shown on SS Drawing
SP700-12.1. 700.29 Lockable Human Access Gates – Access must be
provided to allow inspection access from the highway of all
700.26 Fence Fabric Installation – The fence fabric will
points of all bridges, both ends of culverts greater than 2 m
be fastened to posts on the surface facing away from the
in diameter, retaining walls over 2 m in height, tunnels, and
highway right-of-way, except where the fence is located
farm and wildlife crossing structures.
adjacent to concrete barriers and overpasses.
Lockable human access gates must be located where they
For wood posts, the wire fence fabric shall be stapled to each
can be safely used, avoiding cliffs, steep slopes, swamps,
post, using a maximum vertical spacing of 150 mm
areas frequently under water, and where unstable ground
including both the top and bottom wires. Staples will be
conditions exist. The gates must be located within 25 m of
barbed and galvanized steel, 3.5 mm in diameter with a
the structures and culverts they provide access to, unless a
driven length of at least 50 mm.
greater distance is permitted by the Ministry Representative.
The fence fabric will be attached to steel posts with a The gates shall be of the type specified in SS Drawing
minimum of four (4) galvanized muffler clamps (e.g. SP700-14.1.
MC12300 P type); one on the top strand, one 0.60 m below
Unless otherwise permitted by the Ministry Representative,
the top strand, one 1.20 m below the top strand, and one on
the minimum number of lockable human gates required at
the bottom wire of the fence fabric. Intermediate
specific features are:
connections will be made every 300 mm along the post with
3.5 mm galvanized wire twisted to form a tight connection. (a) Culverts greater than 2 m in diameter – One (1) gate
for each fence located adjacent to the culvert.
The wire fence fabric shall be tensioned to provide a
uniform pull in order to minimize distortion of the fabric. (b) Retaining walls greater than 2 m in height:
Each run of fence fabric between brace panels will be
(i) Retaining walls less than 200 m long: 1 gate where
tensioned before staples are set or clamps tightened.
the wildlife exclusion fencing abuts the wall.
The tension of the fence fabric will be considered adequate
(ii) Retaining walls greater than 200 m long: One (1)
when the fabric cannot be pulled more than 100 mm out of
gate at each location of the wall where the wildlife
line with a 13.6 kg (30 lb) pull at any point from top to
exclusion fencing abuts the wall.
bottom between the posts. The allowable 100 mm will
include any deflection of the post, should this occur. (c) Tunnels – One (1) gate at each tunnel portal.
The fence fabric will be as close to the ground as possible, (d) Bridges – One (1) gate for each location where the
but in any case, the vertical distance between the bottom wildlife exclusion fencing abuts a bridge. The total
strand of wire and the existing ground will nowhere exceed number of gates required for a bridge may be reduced
150 mm. Unerodible, clean fill material, neatly trimmed, by the Ministry Representative if sufficient access,
will be added to obtain this clearance, where practical. during median flow of water conditions, can be
provided and maintained with fewer gates.
Where the fence crosses gullies or drainage channels, a
specially fabricated section of fence will be cut to fit the
opening and will be fastened to the bottom wire and the
streambed as shown on the Drawings. Alternatively, but

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (4 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 294 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

QUALITY ASSURANCE MEASUREMENT


700.30 Quality Assurance – The Ministry Representative 700.40 Fencing – Fencing will be measured by the LINEAL
must be provided a reasonable opportunity to conduct METRE. Measurements will be made parallel to the top
acceptance testing. wire of complete fencing, including any tensioning
assemblies, but excluding gate openings.
The Contractor will disassemble and relocate any elements
of the fence necessary for testing at the discretion of the 700.41 One-Way Gates, Lockable Human Access Gates
Ministry Representative. If the test of an element is and Double Swing Gates – Gates will be measured by the
successful, the Ministry shall pay all costs for the unit for EACH type and size furnished and/or installed
replacement of the materials and reconstruction of the complete in place.
element tested.
PAYMENT
The Ministry Representative may require any element not
tested, or failing the test, to be replaced and retested. 700.50 Fencing – Payment for FENCING, meeting the
requirements as specified to the satisfaction of the Ministry
When the Ministry Representative requests a test of an Representative, will be at the Contract Unit Price per lineal
element of the fence and the test fails, all costs will be to the metre of complete fencing, including any tensioning
Contractor’s account, including the replacement of the assemblies, but excluding one-way gates, lockable human
materials and reconstruction of the element tested, and all access gates, double swing gates.
costs associated with the retesting.
The Contract Unit Price(s) shall be accepted as full
700.30.01 Removal and Replacement at Contractor’s compensation for furnishing all material and/or taking
Expense – The Ministry Representative may require any delivery of Ministry supplied material as and where noted,
fencing materials that do not meet the Ministry’s all labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the
specifications to be removed and replaced at the required installation, including the clearing of any
Contractor’s expense. additional right of way, construction of temporary fencing,
The Ministry Representative may require any constructed connection to existing fences and/or structures, and final
fencing or gates that do not meet the Ministry’s clean up.
specifications to be removed and replaced at the 700.51 Gates – Payment for ONE-WAY GATES,
Contractor’s expense. LOCKABLE HUMAN ACCESS GATES, and DOUBLE
SWING GATES, meeting the requirements as specified to
the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative, will be at the
Contract Unit Price for each type and size furnished and/or
installed complete in place.

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (5 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 295 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (6 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 296 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (7 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 297 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (8 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 298 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (9 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 299 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (10 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 300 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (11 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 301 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (12 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 302 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (13 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 303 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (14 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 304 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (15 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 305 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (16 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 306 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (17 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 307 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (18 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 308 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (19 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 309 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (20 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 310 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (21 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 311 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (22 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 312 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (23 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 313 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (24 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 314 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (25 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 315 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (26 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 316 of 452
SECTION 700 WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING

BC MoTI SS 2020 700 (27 of 27)


Vol. 2 Page 317 of 452
SECTION 741

FENCE CONSTRUCTION
DESCRIPTION 741.11.02 Posts
741.01 Scope – This Section covers the construction of wire (a) Round Wood Post Material – Treated Round Wood
fencing with wood and/or metal posts, gates, wood privacy posts shall be prepared from straight peeled Lodgepole
and noise barrier fencing, and steel sidewalk fencing and, with Pine or Jack Pine.
reference to SS Drawings of the SP741 series, is intended to
(b) Dimensional Tolerances – In addition to the
specify acceptable standards and some optional features as
requirements in SS 909, treated round wood posts shall
may be required by the Special Provisions.
have the following dimensions, each within a 2%
tolerance:
The types of standard wire and chain link fencing covered by
this Section are designated in Table 741-A. (i) Length as necessary to comply with the applicable
SS 741 SP Drawings, for the fence type specified
and the soil type encountered;
Table 741-A: Types of Standard Wire and Chain Link
Fencing (ii) minimum tip diameter of 150 mm; and

Type Description SP drawing (iii) maximum butt diameter of 200 mm.

Special Wire Fabric Fence for use (c) Bottom Tapers – The bottoms of the round wood posts
A SP741-01.01 must be tapered to a rounded end for driveability.
only on railway right-of-way
B Standard Wire Fabric Fence SP741-01.01 741.11.03 Droppers – All droppers shall be free from knots
C Standard Barbed Wire Fence SP741-02.01 and other imperfections injurious to strength.
D Chain Link Fence SP741-05.01 Droppers shall be:
Note: The requirements for Type C fencing are acceptable to the • 1100 mm  25 mm long for 4-wire Type C fences;
Provincial Wildlife Branch and the B.C. Cattlemen's Association. and
See SS 700 for wildlife exclusion fencing. • 1200 mm  25 mm for Type C and C2 fences.
Approved proprietary grooved wood droppers with necessary
MATERIALS wire clips may be specified or approved by the Ministry
Representative for high-tensile smooth-wire fencing.
741.10 General – Steel and wire fence materials including
wire fabric, barbed and high-tensile wire, chain link mesh and Note: For Type C fencing, proprietary prefabricated
metal posts and rails are specified in SS 316. galvanized sheet metal and clip droppers may be approved by
the Ministry Representative as an alternative to the above
Chain link fabric as protection on rock slopes is covered by wood droppers. Galvanized twisted wire fence stays may be
SS 207 and SS 316. specified or permitted only for the extension of normal fence
All materials shall be supplied by the Contractor unless heights to deer height and the like.
Ministry-supply is specified in the Special Provisions. 741.12 Standard Wire Type A, B & C Fences and Gates –
741.11 Treated Wood Materials Materials generally shall be in accordance with the
requirements set out on SS Drawings SP741-01.01 and
741.11.01 General – Wood posts, droppers, and braces shall SP741-02.01, the relevant subsections of SS 316 and and/or
be supplied by the Contractor in accordance with the the Special Provisions.
requirements of SS 909.
741.12.01 Gates – Gates shown on the Drawings shall be of
Treated wood products used in fence construction shall meet the prefabricated type indicated on SS Drawings
the requirements of SS 908 as well as the product specific SP741-04.04, SP741-04.05 and as specified in SS 316.11
requirements in the following related Standard Specification and/or as specified in the Special Provisions.
sections:
741.13 High-tensile Smooth-wire Fences – Materials to be
• SS 316 Steel and Wire Fence Materials supplied include:
• SS 700 Wildlife Exclusion Fencing • high-tensile smooth galvanized wire 2.5 mm
• SS 909 Treated Wood Fence Posts nominal diameter
• mechanical wire splices and fasteners for
high-tensile wire

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (1 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 318 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

• in-line high-tensile wire tensioning devices CONSTRUCTION


• metal or wood droppers for high-tensile fencing. 741.30 Cutting and Boring Treated Wood Products – No
cutting of pressure treated wood posts will be permitted
together with steel posts, gates and hardware, brace wire, without authorization of the Ministry Representative.
dowels, staples and the like in accordance with the relevant
subsections of SS 316. 741.30.01 Cut at Top – When cutting is authorized, the cut
must be only at the top of the round wood post.
741.14 Chain Link Type D Fences and Gates – Chain link
mesh, steel pipe and accessory materials generally shall be in 741.30.01 Treatment – All cuts, borings and superficial
accordance with the requirements set out on SS Drawings damage shall be treated immediately with a preservative in
SP741-05.01 and SP741-05.02, the relevant subsections of accordance with SS 908.
SS 316, and/or the Special Provisions. 741.31 Provision of Fencing – Fencing of the type(s) called
741.14.01 Gates – Gates shown on the Drawings shall be of for shall be carried out at the locations and as shown on the
the type indicated on SS Drawings SP741-05.03 and Drawings with the materials to the height, spacing and with
SP741-05.04 and/or specified by the Special Provisions, and accessories all in accordance with the details indicated on the
shall be equipped with hinges (or sliding) and locking Drawings, Standard Specifications, Special Provisions and SP
hardware. Drawings or to the direction of the Ministry Representative.
741.15 Wood Fences – Materials used for the fabrication and All material shall be supplied by the Contractor except where
installation of wood fences shall be as follows: supply in whole or in part by the Ministry f.o.b. the
Contractor's job site yard or Ministry's yard is specified.
741.15.01 Concrete Footings – All concrete used as post
anchorage backfill shall be well-consolidated Class C Construction shall be carried out with all labour, tools,
concrete conforming to SS 218 Table 218-A, or a non-shrink equipment and incidentals supplied by the Contractor, as
grout, minimum compressive strength of 20 MPa at 28 days, necessary, to complete all fencing work in accordance with
approved by the Ministry Representative. good work practice.
741.15.02 Lumber – Rough sawn or dressed, as specified, 741.32 Clearing & Grading – All trees (other than any
shall be of Western Red Cedar with: required by the Ministry Representative to remain), all brush
and other obstacles which interfere with the construction and
• Wood posts and stringers of "No. 1 Structural" grade maintenance of fencing and not removed by the normal
posts and framing or plank clearing operations, shall be removed prior to commencing
• Boards and planks of "Quality Fencing" grade fencing work so that both sides of the fence line are free of all
except where noise barrier fencing is specified for clearing and grubbing debris.
"Select Fencing" or plank equivalent. The cleared and graded area must be a minimum of 3 m wide
741.15.03 Galvanized steel pipe – 48 mm OD for privacy on each side of the fence to permit access for fence repairs
fence posts shall conform to the requirements of SS 316.10 and maintenance, unless a lesser width is permitted by the
with weatherproof caps where open ends are not covered by Ministry Representative. The graded area shall have a 2-5%
wood members. cross-fall towards the open side of the slope to provide
drainage. No fill shall be placed in any drainage path that
741.15.04 Steel – Steel used as posts for noise barrier fences crosses the fence line.
or as wood post supports shall be of the structural shape(s)
indicated in accordance with CSA G40.21, Grade 300W and The ground line for the fence should be smooth and
where galvanized, hot dipped to the requirements of ASTM continuous for a minimum of 1 m on both sides of the fence.
A123. Minor ground undulations shall be corrected to obtain a
smooth uniform grade, but appreciable grade depressions may
741.15.05 Fastenings: Bolts generally shall conform to be backfilled only with the permission of the Ministry
ASTM A307, nuts to ASTM A563 Grade A, plain washers to Representative.
Type A, plate washers, where required, to ASTM A36; all
galvanized according to CSA G164. Nails shall be casing The site shall be left in a smooth and tidy condition.
headed heavy gauge of appropriate length, hot dip galvanized 741.33 Setting Out and Connections to Existing – Fence
with deformed shank (annular, barbed or helical) for noise line, as shown on the Drawings, generally will be along the
barrier fence plank fixing. right-of-way boundary. Where undergrowth clearing is
741.15.06 Finish – If required, penetrating stain with carried out to the right-of-way boundary, the fence line will
preservative shall be of type and colour specified in the be offset 0.5 m in from the boundary.
Contract, and be applied to all surfaces after cutting to size, Post installation in fill material or minimum overburden shall
prior to prefabrication or installation, and on any cuts before be carried out to the Ministry Representative's directions.
final fitment. Where it is not possible to drive or set wood posts to proper

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (2 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 319 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

depth or to relocate same along the fence line, steel fence Corner and intersection assemblies shall be similarly
posts as specified or, where permitted, multiple wood post and tensioned in each fence direction.
brace assemblies shall be substituted.
Intermediate tensioning assemblies shall be provided within
Existing cross fences shall be connected to new with posts and the maximum spacings indicated on SS Drawings
braces for tensioning fencing wire in every direction in SP741-01.02 and SP741-02.02 to make use of rolls of fabric
accordance with SS Drawings SP741-01.03 and SP741-02.02. etc. of standard length with a minimum of cutting and waste.
741.34 Standard Wire Type A, B & C Fences and Gates Steel corner, intersection and intermediate tensioning
assemblies with steel angle posts and diagonal bracing are
741.34.01 Post Installation – Fence posts shall be driven in
indicated on SS Drawing SP741-04.01.
place with equipment acceptable to the Ministry
Representative, set in augered pilot holes or, where permitted Horizontal alignment changes over 30 with wood posts and
by the Ministry Representative, set in dug holes with over 15 with steel posts shall be stabilized as for corners
necessary well tamped backfill for a firm installation and post above. Where a change is less than 30 with wood posts, a
penetration to at least the depth indicated on SS Drawings pair of line posts, set 2.4 m or 3.0 m apart, shall be stabilized
SP741-01.01 and SP741-02.01. with a horizontal wood brace and diagonal wire bracing both
On straight alignments all posts shall be plumb. On ways. For a change of less than 15 with steel posts, a steel
appreciable grades, posts shall be installed perpendicular to line post at the change shall be stabilized in both directions
the slope. with diagonal steel braces to adjoining line posts as indicated
on SS Drawing SP741-04.01.
On curved alignments, the posts shall be set 50 mm off plumb
away from the curve centre, with a post spacing in accordance Similar requirements shall be maintained at each change to or
with SS Drawing SP741-04.02 and increased post lengths and within any curved fence alignment where the closer post
bury depth for post stability where necessary. spacing indicated by SS Drawing SP741-04.02 is not
considered adequate.
Gate post sizes and stabilizing shall be as required by the
Special Provisions and/or SS Drawing SP741-04.04. Note: The previous requirements for alignment changes may
be waived by the Ministry Representative wherever, from
Steel fence posts, as specified by SS 316.09, are required on consideration of the soil conditions, the Ministry
exposed rock or rock with "minimum overburden" (as defined Representative directs that the stability and strength of the
on SS Drawing SP741-04.01) and shall be driven and/or fence is not likely to be appreciably lessened by such change
wedged to the full depth in a vertical drilled hole of minimum of alignment.
diameter or set plumb and rigid in cement and sand or fine
aggregate mortar all as indicated by SS Drawing Vertical alignment changes shall be stabilized, and fence
SP741-04.01. requirements at ditch and gully conditions shall be as called
for by SS Drawing SP741-04.03 or as the Ministry
Note: Assemblies of securely wire tied multiple wood Representative may direct.
posts/braces may be specified or permitted by the Ministry
Representative especially for minor rock outcropping and 741.34.03 Fabric and Wire – Fence fabric shall normally be
unforeseen minimum overburden occurrences. installed on the side of the posts away from the highway,
stretched between end type assemblies and intermediate
When full bury depth of wood posts is not attainable, the tensioning assemblies with proper equipment (tensioning
specified steel fence posts shall be used to the full penetration directly by truck or tractor will not normally be permitted) and
into rock, all as indicated on SS Drawing SP741-04.01. securely stapled in accordance with good practice to wood
Tops of all posts shall be set to a uniform 50 mm above the posts, as indicated by SS Drawing SP741-01.01, or securely
level of the top wire of fencing and, where necessary, cut to wired or clipped to steel posts to permit free wire movement
line-up in vertical uniformity after inspection by the Ministry on line posts. Similarly, barbed wire shall be installed so as
Representative. Wood post tops where cut, shall be bevelled to allow it to "prestretch" before final tensioning, and shall be
and preservative treated in two heavy applications. securely stapled to tensioning assemblies.

Wood posts which are burred, split or otherwise damaged For fencing on a curve requiring the fabric and/or barbed wire
from the installation, and which are not acceptable to the on the highway side of the posts, all line wires shall be double
Ministry Representative shall be replaced at the Contractor's stapled and the top wire shall be securely wire tied to posts in
expense. addition where the adjoining property has livestock.

741.34.02 Bracing for Fence Tensioning – Braces of treated Barbed wire Type C fences shall normally have wood
wood and twisted galvanized diagonal wire shall be installed droppers "interwoven" and securely figure-of-eight wire tied
between end posts and adjoining panel posts to stabilize the to every line wire, as indicated by SS Drawing SP741-02.01.
tensioning of the fencing fabric and/or barbed wire, all as Alternatively, proprietary galvanized sheet metal
indicated by SS Drawings SP741-01.03 and SP741-02.03. prefabricated droppers of pre-approved design for secure
clip-on application may be approved.

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (3 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 320 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

Note: High livestock pressures may warrant Type C1 fencing Stapling doubled at curves, etc. and mechanical fasteners at
and nursery livestock enclosures Type C1 or B fencing. tied-off ends and splices (where permitted) shall be to BC
Where such fences, 1200 mm and higher, are in wildlife Ministry of Agriculture recommended practice.
sensitive areas, the top strand may be specified smooth
With supplied tensioning devices installed in each line, all
(barbless) as Type C2 or B1 fences.
wires shall be individually tensioned in stages and after
741.34.04 Gates – Hardware, of design to permit the gate to "wire-set" to 1.33 kN (300 lbs) at completion.
operate correctly, shall be securely attached to prevent the
Droppers, as supplied, shall be installed and securely clipped
easy removal of the gate and hardware. Hinges shall be
to all line wires at 3 to 4 m spacing.
installed to permit the gate to swing back one-way against the
fence. Locking hardware shall be of the type specified. 741.36 Chain Link Type D Fences and Gates
741.35 High-tensile Smooth-wire Fences – For rangeland 741.36.01 Post and Rail Installation
and other locations with favourable terrain, soil conditions
(a) All terminal posts (posts at ends, gates, corners and
and fence alignment at the locations indicated on Drawings,
construct high-tensile smooth-wire fencing between rigid end, intersections), all line posts and any intermediate
gates, corner and any necessary intermediate tensioning tensioning posts shall be set plumb into concrete footings
in augered or dug holes to the depths and regular spacing
assemblies in general accordance with SS Drawings
all as shown on SS Drawing SP741-05.01, or as otherwise
SP741-03.01 through SP741-03.03.
specified or directed.
741.35.01 Fence Style – Fence style for wildlife crossing
areas shall comprise 5 wires, the bottom wire for installation (b) Gate post sizes and stabilizing shall be as required by the
Special Provisions and/or SS Drawing SP741-05.03.
at 250 mm  50 mm above grade at and between posts, the
next two wires at 200 mm spacing and the top two 225 mm (c) On exposed rock, posts shall be set without concrete
for a total height of 1100 mm, as indicated by SS Drawing footings to full depth and fully grouted in holes, 25 mm
SP741-03.01 for HT Fences. Elsewhere, and for nursery greater than the pipe diameter, drilled to a depth into solid
livestock enclosures and other areas of high livestock rock of half the depth of pipe bury to that indicated for
pressure, a 6-wire fence may be specified, having the bottom concrete footings on Drawing SP741-05.01 (i.e. c/2 and
wire 200 mm  50 mm above grade at and between posts with f/2)
the remaining wires at 200 mm spacing for a total height of
Grout shall be non-shrink cement and sand mortar.
1200 mm indicated as HT-1 Fences.
Standard length posts may be used where the overburden
741.35.02 Post and Brace Installation – Fence posts shall be depth is such that the depth of bury into solid rock is less
driven in place with equipment acceptable to the Ministry than that specified above, provided normal diameter
Representative and set out in general accordance with the concrete footings of the diameter indicated on SS
recommendations of the B.C. Ministry of Agriculture “BC Drawing SP741-05.01 are formed from solid rock to
Agricultural Fencing Handbook”, good local trade practice grade level. Similarly, form concrete footings for posts
and to the Ministry Representative's direction. set in loose or friable rock. Sleeves shall be provided to
form holes similar in diameter and depth to above for
Terminal (end and gate) tensioning assemblies and any
casting into concrete where shown or specified.
intermediate assemblies shall be "single" assemblies and at
the spacings and post bury depths indicated by SS Drawing (d) Tops of all posts shall be set or cut for an even height of
SP741-03.02 (or such greater depths and/or decreased top rail, which shall form a continuous brace and mesh
spacings as may be directed by Ministry Representative) with support between terminal posts and any intermediate
"double" assemblies used with scant bury depths all to form tensioning posts. Top rails shall pass through line post
rigid, stable and accurately aligned assemblies for tensioning caps and be joined in the length with internal sleeves to
line wires. allow expansion and contraction. All posts shall be fitted
with appropriate weathertight caps securely fixed.
Line posts 100 mm minimum diameter driven to a depth of
not less than 650 mm in firm soil, or as otherwise required by 741.36.02 Bracing for Fence Tensioning – Bottom tension
SS Drawing SP741-03.01, or directed, shall be spaced up to a wire shall be securely fixed taut and sag free to terminal posts
maximum of 15 m where permitted, but normally at 10 m and any intermediate tensioning posts. Similarly, provide top
spacing and such closer spacing at changes in horizontal and tension wire, when specified, in place of top rail to pass
vertical alignments to keep the bottom wire at the regular through line post tops except on uneven terrain where the
specified ground clearance. height of the top tension wire shall be such that it is secured
to all line posts and the mesh within the top 300 mm of the
741.35.03 Wire and Dropper Installation – Wires shall be mesh.
installed on the side of the fence posts away from the highway
except on such curves requiring the wires on the highway side Terminal posts, where more than 10 m apart in any fence run,
so as to bear on the posts. shall have horizontal pipe braces to adjoining line posts.
Diagonal pipe braces may be called for where soil conditions

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (4 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 321 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

warrant, especially where fencing without top rails is SP741.05.02. The mesh shall be installed on the highway side
specified, but no pipe bracing is normally required for of the fence posts, or as otherwise specified or directed, and
residential height fences. joints in the length shall be made by weaving the meshes
together with a single wire picket to form a neat continuous
Intermediate tensioning assemblies shall be provided where
fabric mesh.
terminal posts are more than 150 m apart, and at any
subsequent 150 m maximum spacing, to consist of a straining Security barbed wire, where specified, shall be installed in the
post (to full height of fence where barbed wire on extension slots of all extension arms and secured to extended height
arms is specified) with horizontal pipe braces at the mid to terminal and any intermediate tensioning posts taut and free
two-thirds height above grade to adjoining line posts each of sag.
way for the discontinuity of top rail, tension and/or barbed
741.36.04 Gates – Hardware, of design to permit the gate to
wire and mesh; provide similar tensioning assembly at abrupt
operate correctly, shall be securely attached to prevent the
vertical alignment changes.
easy removal of the gate and hardware. Hinged gates shall be
Horizontal alignment changes where abrupt shall be installed to permit the gate to swing back one-way against the
considered as corners. fence.
At changes in horizontal alignment and to curved fence 741.37 Wood Fences
alignments, where the top rail can be continuous by accurately
741.37.01 Privacy Fences – Galvanized pipe posts shall be
bending to proper curvature without damage to the galvanized
set plumb in concrete footings in augered or dug holes to the
coating, a pair of line posts shall be stabilized and tensioned
depth and regular spacing all as shown on Drawing
as follows:
SP741-06.02.
(a) A horizontal pipe brace shall be securely fixed to
Wood fixing members for fence panels shall be securely
adjoining line posts at the two-thirds height above grade.
nailed, "II-shaped" frames fixed and supported with 9.5 mm
(b) Crossed diagonal wire braces shall each be two strands (3/8") galvanized bolts and nuts to pipe posts all as indicated
of 3.5 mm nominal diameter galvanized wire securely on SS Drawing SP741-06.01.
fixed to the brace band fixing of the horizontal brace and
Metal fixing members for fence panels, when specified, shall
to a brace band 100 mm above grade.
be of named or otherwise pre-approved proprietary brand or
(c) Each pair of wires shall be twisted taut to mutually detailed formed metal channel and strap, bolted on around
stabilize the assembly with the tensioning battens left in pipe posts and securely machine screwed and tapped at the
place. correct levels all as indicated on SS Drawing SP741-06.03.
Similar requirements shall be maintained within any curved Fence panels of boards and stringers prestained, if specified,
fence alignment over 30 m in length. shall be prefabricated to the required design, as indicated by
the Contract Drawings, Special Provisions and/or SS
Note: The previous requirements may be waived by the
Drawings SP741-06.01 through SP741-06.03, and shall be
Ministry Representative wherever the Ministry
accurately fitted and securely nailed to fixing members on
Representative directs that, from consideration of the soil
steel posts to form uniformly level and/or stepped fencing.
conditions and footing sizes, especially where with
continuous top rail, the stability and strength of the fence is 741.37.02 Noise Barrier Fences – Posts of indicated type,
not likely to be appreciably lessened by the change in size and length shall be set plumb in concrete footings in
alignment. augered or dug holes to the depth and regular spacing all as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
Fencing where continuous over a creek or ditch shall be
stabilized with a horizontal pipe brace and diagonal brace Stringers, to bear full width of post at each end of
wires as specified above, and the bottom tension wire shall be "alternating" or "zig zag" (on plan) panels, shall be securely
wire tied to a similar pipe brace. In addition, in-fill under bolted with large washers behind head and nut.
where specified or required, shall be a hanging or rigidly fixed
Planking shall be firmly secured to stringers with deformed
bent pipe of brace diameter hung or in-filled with closely
shank nails to form close butted and battened or tightly
spaced barbed wire or suitable fence fabric (similar to that
overlapped vertical planked panels. All gaps, especially at
indicated on SS Drawing SP741-04.03), all to the Ministry
bottom, shall not exceed 1% of the total area of the fencing.
Representative's direction.
Ends of panels shall be closed over the gap between stringer
741.36.03 Fabric and Wire – Chain link fencing mesh shall and post with return plank material.
be stretched between terminal posts and any intermediate
741.38 Steel Sidewalk Fencing – Steel sidewalk fence and
tensioning posts with proper equipment (tensioning directly
bicyclist sidewalk fencing shall be installed in accordance
by truck or tractor will not normally be permitted), and
with SS Drawings SP741-07.01, SP741-07.02 and
secured with tension bars and bands, tie wire and clips all in
SP741-07.03 as applicable.
accordance with the requirements shown on Drawing

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (5 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 322 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

741.39 Touch-up of Galvanized Coatings – Touch-up PAYMENT


treatment for damaged galvanizing of steel posts and braces
741.91 Fencing – Payment for FENCING will be at the
shall be with two heavy coats of zinc rich paint selected from
Contract Unit Price per metre of complete fencing, including
the Ministry’s Recognized Products List under the category
any tensioning assemblies, but excluding gate openings.
of “Additional Paint Coatings – Zinc-Rich Touch-up Paints
and Primers. The Contract Unit Price(s) shall be accepted as full
compensation for furnishing all material and/or taking
delivery of Ministry supplied material; as and where noted,
MEASUREMENT all labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the
required installation, including the clearing of any additional
741.81 Fencing – Fencing will be measured by the LINEAR
right of way, construction of temporary fencing, connection
METRE. Measurements will be made parallel to the ground
to existing fences and structures, and final clean up; but
line of complete fencing, including any tensioning
excluding any work as may be required to be separately paid
assemblies, but excluding gate openings.
for, such as the extra cost of extensive fencing on rock at the
741.82 Gates and Cattleguards – Gates and cattleguards will contract or agreed price for each hole drilled for metal posts.
be measured by the unit for EACH type and size furnished
741.92 Gates and Cattleguards – Payment for GATES and
and/or installed complete in place.
CATTLEGUARDS will be at the Contract Unit Price for each
type and size furnished and/or installed complete in place.
741.93 Steel Sidewalk Fencing – Payment for steel sidewalk
fence and bicyclist sidewalk fencing will be at the Contract
Unit Price per metre of complete fencing.

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (6 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 323 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (7 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 324 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (8 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 325 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (9 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 326 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (10 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 327 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (11 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 328 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (12 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 329 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (13 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 330 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (14 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 331 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (15 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 332 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (16 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 333 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (17 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 334 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (18 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 335 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (19 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 336 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (20 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 337 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (21 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 338 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (22 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 339 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (23 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 340 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (24 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 341 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (25 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 342 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (26 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 343 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (27 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 344 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (28 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 345 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (29 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 346 of 452
SECTION 741 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 741 (30 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 347 of 452
SECTION 751

TOPSOIL AND LANDSCAPE GRADING

DESCRIPTION MATERIALS
751.01 Scope – This Section refers to those portions of work 751.11 General – In this Section, a range of measurable
that are unique to the supply and placement of topsoil and physical and chemical properties are set out as being
subsequent finish grading. In this Section, the term acceptable in a topsoil. Compliance with this Section shall
"topsoil" is used to identify: be determined by testing for those properties. When
imported or on-Site topsoil is used, it shall be tested and
• On-Site topsoil: material stockpiled for use, or modified as necessary by a mixture of other components to
• Imported topsoil, or bring its properties to within the range set in SS 751.16, or
as stated in the Special Provisions. Topsoil shall not be
• Manufactured topsoil (Growing Medium), including prepared or handled in an excessively wet or frozen
Biosolids Growing Medium (BGM) or Biotic Soil condition, or in any manner in which structure is adversely
Matrix (BSM) products where specified in the affected.
Contract.
751.12 Topsoil Types – Three topsoil types are described
in SS 751.13 through SS 751.15. Regardless of origin, all
751.02 Related Work types shall conform to SS 751.16.
• SS 754, Planting of Trees, Shrubs and Ground Covers; 751.13 On-Site Topsoil – On-Site topsoil may be used, as
• SS 757, Revegetation Seeding. specified in the Special Provisions, provided that it meets
the standard set for imported topsoil and can be modified to
751.03 References meet the requirements set out for the specified topsoil. On-
Site topsoil shall be defined as the existing "A" horizon
• Canadian Landscape Standard,
containing accumulated organic matter. On-Site topsoil
• Canadian System of Soil Classification, shall be tested prior to stockpiling. Upon approval by the
Ministry Representative of the suitability of the on-Site
• Canada Fertilizers Act and Fertilizers Regulations, topsoil for topsoil, a sufficient quantity of stripped on-Site
• Canadian National Master Specification, topsoil shall be stockpiled where shown on the Drawings or
in areas designated for stockpiling.
• Weed Control Act & Weed Control Regulation,
751.14 Imported Topsoil – Imported topsoil shall be of a
• B.C Field Sampling Manual, sandy loam or loamy sand texture (no less than 50% sand
by weight) containing between 4% and 15% organic matter
• Environmental Management Act - Organic Matter
(dry weight basis).
Recycling Regulation, and
Imported topsoil shall be free of propagules of plant species
• Open Burning Smoke Control Regulation.
designated as noxious under the Weed Control Act &
751.04 Topsoil Supplied by the Contractor – The Regulation, and other invasive or undesirable plant species,
Contractor shall advise the Ministry Representative of the as determined by the Ministry Representative.
sources of topsoil not less than seven days before any is used
At least 80% of imported topsoil shall pass a Tyler #10 sieve
in the work.
after appropriate crushing of structural units using accepted
The Contractor shall, at the Contractor's expense, acquire a laboratory test methods.
soil analysis from an accredited soil testing laboratory, to
751.15 Manufactured Topsoil – Manufactured topsoil is
verify that supplied material is within the requirements
any soil or growing medium mixture with chemical and
indicated. All soil tests shall follow the British Columbia
physical properties that fall within ranges required by this
Field Sampling and Environmental Lab Manual. Results of
Section for a particular application.
the soil test are to be submitted to the Ministry
Representative prior to installation. Manufactured topsoil shall meet the requirements in the
Organic Matter Recycling Regulation and conform to
The Ministry Representative will approve all topsoil once it
SS 751.16 or as specified in the Special Provisions.
has met the standard required at the source.
751.15.01 Biotic Soil Media (BSM) – Where specified in
the Contract, the BSM shall be designed as an alternative to
topsoil and/or compost to accelerate development of

BC MoTI SS 2020 751 (1 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 348 of 452
SECTION 751 TOPSOIL AND LANDSCAPE GRADING

depleted soils/substrates with low organic matter, low (b) General:


nutrient levels and limited biological activity.
(i) Acidity – in accordance with Table 751-A.
BSM products used must be non-toxic with fibers that have Maximum of 0.5 kg/m2 of dolomite lime to achieve
been phytosanitized to eliminate potential weed seeds and the required pH level.
pathogens prior to the introduction of soil building
(ii) Salinity – saturation extract conductivity shall not
components.
exceed 3.0 mmho/cm at 25°C. Sodium absorption
BSM products shall not be used for erosion control and shall ration (SAR) as calculated from analysis of
be applied to enhance vegetation establishment and growth saturated extract shall not exceed 8.0.
only.
(iii) C/N Ratio – carbon to nitrogen ratio shall not
Where erosion control is required, the BSM shall be exceed 40:1.
installed in a two-phase process with the BSM hydraulically
(iv) Texture – in accordance with Table 751-A.
applied first with the seed, then covered with an erosion
control product. BSM products may also be applied dry (v) Organic Content – in accordance with
with broadcast seeding methods. Refer to SS 757. Table 751-A.
751.16 Requirements for Topsoil – Acceptance of
Table 751-A: Properties of Topsoil for Different
commercially processing and mixing of topsoil components
Applications
shall only be from a facility operating under a valid permit
under the Environmental Management Act. The resulting
Planting Areas,
product shall be a homogenous mixture having the required Low Traffic
Planters, Shrub
properties throughout. Lawn Areas
Properties and
Trees and
The general amendment of any topsoil by mixing in situ Groundcover
Large Shrubs
with rototill cultivation equipment or using equipment with Areas
tracks to ensure mixing and good contact with subsurface
Texture:
soils after placement, is acceptable if carried out to the Percent of Dry Weight Mineral
by particle size
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative. Fertilizers Fraction (%)
classes1
typically used at time of seeding or planting will be surface
applied and incorporated as described in SS 751.33. • Coarse Gravel
> 19 mm 0–3 0-3
The Contractor shall also require the laboratory to include < 40 mm
recommendations for incorporating fertilizers and other soil
amendments into the topsoil as needed for plant • All Gravel
establishment and maintenance, and as they specifically > 2 mm 0 – 10 0 - 10
relate to: < 40 mm
• grassed areas; • Sand 30 – 70 30 – 70
(0.05 to 2 mm)
• ground covers, shrubs and trees;
• Silt & Clay
container or planter box installations; and, Maximum 60% Maximum 60%
• combined
• to site conditions and season of planting. Acidity (pH) 6.0 – 7.0 4.5 – 7.0
Refer to Table 751-A for required properties of growing Drainage:
medium for different applications. Minimum
saturated
715.16.01 Specific Requirements – Other specific
hydraulic 2.0 2.0
requirements are as follows:
conductivity
(a) Fertility: (cm/hr) in
place
(i) Nitrogen – total nitrogen shall be 0.2% to 0.6% by
weight. Organic
Content:
(ii) Phosphorus – available phosphorus shall be 20 to 2 – 10 5 – 20
Percent of Dry
250 ppm. Weight (%)
(iii) Potassium – available potassium shall be 50 to 1
Note: Per the Canadian Landscape Standard and
1000 ppm. Canadian System of Soil Classification
(iv) Boron – concentration in saturation extract shall
not exceed 1 ppm

BC MoTI SS 2020 751 (2 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 349 of 452
SECTION 751 TOPSOIL AND LANDSCAPE GRADING

(vi) Sawdust - Cedar or redwood sawdust shall not be 751.17.04 Wood Residuals – Raw sawdust and wood waste
present in the topsoil. are not acceptable components of topsoil. Wood residuals
used as a component of topsoil, compost, farm animal
(vii) Deleterious Materials - Soil shall be virtually free
manure or mushroom manure are acceptable provided they
from subsoil, wood including woody plant parts,
are rotted and the total Carbon to total Nitrogen ratio for the
toxic materials, stones over 30 mm, foreign
topsoil is a maximum of 40:1.
objects, and propagules of plant species designated
as noxious under the Weed Control Act & Weed 751.18 Fertilizers – Fertilizers shall be standard
Control Regulation, and other invasive or commercial brands, meeting the requirements of the Canada
undesirable plant species, as determined by the Fertilizers Act and Fertilizers Regulations.
Ministry Representative,
All fertilizers shall be in granular, pelleted or prill form, and
(viii) Drainage – in accordance with Table 751-A. shall be dry, free-flowing and free from lumps.
Drainage of growing medium can be measured
Fertilizers shall be packed in standard waterproof
only after growing medium is in place. Mixing and
containers, clearly marked with the name of the
handling of growing medium shall be done in such
manufacturer, weight and guaranteed analysis.
a manner that the minimum saturated hydraulic
conductivity indicated is achieved. All fertilizer shall be stored in a weatherproof storage place
and in such a manner that it will stay dry and its
751.17 Soil Amendments – The following soil
effectiveness will not be impaired.
amendments shall be added to the topsoil as required.
The types, formulations, and rates of application for
751.17.01 Peat Moss – Peat moss shall be Horticultural
fertilizers and liming agents to topsoil supplied by the
grade, partially decomposed fibrous or cellular stems and
Contractor shall be as recommended by a laboratory soil
leaves of sphagnum mosses with a texture varying from
specialist on the basis of tests of the topsoil, and as approved
porous to spongy fibrous, fairly elastic and substantially
by the Ministry Representative.
homogeneous with pH value not less than 3.5 and not
greater than 6.5, medium to coarse shredded, suitable for Substitutions or variations in fertilizers and methods shall
horticultural purposes. be made only upon pre-approval by the Ministry
Representative.
751.17.02 Sand – Sand shall be clean river pump sand or
alternative source approved by the Ministry Representative, 751.19 Fill Material – Fill Material shall not be toxic to
free of impurities, chemical or organic matter. plant and animal life in part or in concentration and may not
contain invasive knotweed plant material (Polygonum or
Particle size in sand shall be as follows:
Fallopia spp.).
• 95 – 100% passing a 4.75 mm sieve;
• 0 – 40% passing a 0.600 mm sieve;
CONSTRUCTION
• 0 – 5% passing a 0.075 mm sieve.
751.31 Area Preparation
751.17.03 Manure and Compost – Manure shall be well-
751.31.01 Stripping of Topsoil – Existing top soil material,
rotted farm animal manure or mushroom manure, rotted to
shall be stripped and removed to stockpile(s) within the
the extent that the material is crumbly. Manure shall be free
project area at least 10 m from water unless otherwise
from propagules of plant species designated as noxious
approved by the Ministry Representative, kept properly
under the BC Weed Control Act & Regulation, and other
drained, and maintained in a neat and presentable condition
invasive or undesirable plant species, rocks, sticks, rubble,
free of spoil, propagules of invasive plants and other weedy
and shall contain not more than 40% composted sawdust,
species and subsoil material for subsequent spreading on
straw or shavings.
prepared rough graded areas.
Commercial compost shall be free from propagules of plant
Sites chosen for storage of topsoil shall be free of noxious
species designated as noxious under the BC Weed Control
weeds and invasive plants. If invasive plants or noxious
Act & Regulation, and other invasive or undesirable plant
weeds are present at a storage site, propagules shall be
species, as determined by the Ministry Representative,
removed prior to stockpiling topsoil at the site.
coliform, pathogens and chemical or toxic contaminants.
Physical contaminants such as rocks, plastic, metal or glass If topsoil is planned to be or actually is stockpiled for more
shall be less than 0.5%. Compost shall not be derived from than one month, those stockpiles must be covered or seeded
or contain processed municipal sewage sludge (i.e. to prevent erosion and invasive plant or noxious weed
biosolids), unless such product is authorized for use by establishment.
Provincial Environmental Agencies, and meets all local
Stockpiled topsoil shall be inspected for the presence of
regulations and approvals.
invasive plants or noxious weeds prior to spreading onto

BC MoTI SS 2020 751 (3 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 350 of 452
SECTION 751 TOPSOIL AND LANDSCAPE GRADING

prepared rough graded areas, and any topsoil containing 751.31.04 Scarifying – All landscape area subgrade shall
noxious weeds shall either be treated prior to use to remove be scarified to a minimum depth of 150 mm perpendicular
all propagules or disposed of appropriately at the to the slope immediately before placing topsoil.
contractor’s expense, unless the Ministry Representative
751.31.05 Cleanup – All unsuitable material and inorganic
authorizes its use as fill elsewhere on the project. Topsoil
debris shall be removed from the project area by the
containing knotweed plant material (Polygonum or Fallopia
Contractor unless the Ministry Representative authorizes its
spp.) shall not be used as fill.
use in fill areas on the project.
The storage of topsoil shall not interfere with the effective
All surplus or unsuitable organic waste and debris shall be
utilization of a granular source or borrow pits. See also
removed from the Site and disposed in a suitable location
SS 165.06.02 Placement of Stripped Material.
unless its complete burning is approved by the Ministry
751.31.02 Preparation of Landscape Area Subgrade – Representative in compliance with the B.C. Open Burning
This Section applies only to grading of landscaped areas Smoke Control Regulation.
outside the roadway prism.
751.32 Placing Topsoil – The landscape area subgrade shall
Rough grading shall be carried out by necessary cutting and be inspected and approved by the Ministry Representative,
filling work to produce the lines and grades shown on the before topsoil is placed.
Drawings and as directed by the Ministry Representative,
The topsoil shall be:
allowing for the stipulated new topsoil thickness.
• placed over the prepared landscape area subgrade and
Surplus excavated material shall be removed from the Site
shall be allowed to settle or be compacted by light
and disposed of at the Contractor's expense unless the
rolling such that it is firm against deep footprints and
Ministry Representative authorizes its use as fill elsewhere
shall not be compacted more than necessary to meet
on the project.
this requirement;
The landscape area subgrade shall be prepared to a
• moist (25% to 75% of field capacity) but not wet when
consistent 80 – 85% Standard Proctor maximum dry density
placed, and shall not be handled if frozen or wet such
in accordance with ASTM D698.
that its structure will be altered;
Soft and unstable areas below the landscape area subgrade
• manually spread around trees, shrubs and obstacles;
that cannot be compacted to this standard shall be excavated
and filled with suitable fill material, except in locations • evenly spread to a depth which after settlement or light
where special environmental conditions have been compaction will be that shown in the Drawings or as
identified. In such cases, appropriate alternative solutions directed by the Ministry Representative.
shall be approved by the Ministry Representative and
During hauling and spreading, the paved roadway and other
Environmental Agencies as required and carried out.
finished surfaces including subgrade under future base
Debris, roots, branches, stones, building material, courses shall be kept clean and free of all topsoil.
contaminated subsoil, visible invasive plants or weeds and
Placement of manufactured soil shall follow the
anything else that may interfere with the proper growth and
manufacturer’s specifications.
development of the planned finished landscaping shall be
removed. 751.33 Applying Fertilizers – Fertilizers and soil
Fill materials shall be placed so as to achieve stability. This amendments shall be added to bring topsoil fertility within
may necessitate placing in lifts of 225 mm and compacting the ranges set out in this Section or as specified in the
each layer to 80 – 85% Standard Proctor maximum dry Special Provisions.
density. Manufactured topsoil and processed imported topsoil will
typically have fertilizers and amendments incorporated at
Grade transitions of landscape area subgrade should be
smooth and even and shall be such that ponding cannot the time of mixing and screening, while other topsoil will
occur on the landscape area subgrade surface. receive in situ amendment.
Fertilizers normally applied at the time of seeding and
Existing landforms shall be warped and blended into the
planting are specified under the appropriate sections. These
landscaped areas with a minimum of visual disharmony.
fertilizers are generally supplemental to the base fertility
751.31.03 Fine Grading – Areas requiring topsoil shall be requirements outlined for topsoil and are applied after
fine graded by raking out spoil material and debris such as topsoil is in place.
rocks, asphalt and concrete over 50 mm in diameter.
Surface applied fertilizers shall be evenly spread over the
Naturalized areas not requiring topsoil shall be similarly topsoil with a suitable mechanical spreader and fully
cleaned, raked and manicured. incorporated to a minimum depth of 50 mm.

BC MoTI SS 2020 751 (4 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 351 of 452
SECTION 751 TOPSOIL AND LANDSCAPE GRADING

Lime used for top dressing shall be thoroughly cultivated PAYMENT


into the top 100 mm of topsoil.
751.91 General – Payment for TOPSOIL supplied by the
751.34 Finish Grading – After placing the topsoil to the Contractor will be at the Contract Unit Price bid per cubic
finish elevations and contours required, the grade shall be metre. The Unit Price bid for topsoil supplied by the
finished to a high standard, to the grades shown on the Contractor shall be accepted as full compensation for all
Drawings with a smooth and even surface. Rough spots and handling, any necessary screening and testing of topsoil,
low areas shall be eliminated to ensure positive surface and for delivery and off-loading on the area to be topsoiled.
drainage, and the surface shall be left smooth, uniform, free
Payment for TOPSOIL SPREADING will be at the
of debris and firm enough to resist deep footprinting.
Contract Unit Price bid per square metre. The Unit Price
Topsoil placed in traffic islands and medians shall be bid for topsoil spreading shall be full compensation for all
crowned for drainage, as shown on SS Drawing SP751-01. labour and equipment required for the specified preparation,
spreading, and finish grading of the topsoil, and for all
incidental work not required to be separately paid for.
MEASUREMENT
Separate prices may be included in the Contract to cover the
751.81 General – Measurement for the supply of topsoil by area preparation work such as:
the Contractor will be by the CUBIC METRE in the truck
• clearing and grubbing,
at the point of delivery. Topsoil removed from stockpiles
will be measured in place in the stockpile. • stripping existing topsoil and removal to stockpile,
The placing of topsoil will be measured by the SQUARE • rough grading and fill,
METRE for the stipulated topsoil thickness, unless stated
• naturalizing with fine grading,
otherwise in the Special Provisions.
• rotovating and soil conditioning, and
• trenching for irrigation and sub-soil drainage systems.

BC MoTI SS 2020 751 (5 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 352 of 452
SECTION 751 TOPSOIL AND LANDSCAPE GRADING

BC MoTI SS 2020 751 (6 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 353 of 452
SECTION 754

PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

DESCRIPTION Approval of plant material at the source does not preclude


rejection of non-conforming stock on the Site prior to, or after
754.01 Scope – This Section refers to those portions of the
planting.
work that are unique to the supply and planting of trees,
shrubs and ground covers, including seeded and sodded areas The guarantee shall not apply to plants and planted areas
that are not designated for treatment under SS 757 damaged after Acceptance by causes beyond the Contractor's
“Revegetation Seeding”. This Section must be referenced and control, such as vandalism, "acts of God", "excessive wear
interpreted simultaneously with all other Sections pertinent to and tear", or abuse.
the works described herein.
754.02 Related Work
MATERIALS
• SS 751, Topsoil and Landscape Grading;
754.11 Source Quality Control – The Contractor shall notify
• SS 757, Revegetation Seeding. the Ministry Representative of the sources of plant materials
to be supplied at least two weeks prior to commencing the
754.03 References landscape work. All non-seed plant materials shall be made
• Canadian Nursery Stock Standard (Canadian Nursery available for inspection at the nursery by the Ministry
Trades Association), Representative upon at least three days notice. Field grown
material is not to be dug prior to inspection. All materials
• BC Weed Control Act & Regulations, shall be free of plant species designated as noxious under the
• Integrated Pest Management Act & Regulation, BC Weed Control Act & Regulation, and other invasive or
undesirable plant species as determined by the Ministry
• Canada Seeds Act & Seeds Regulations, Representative.
• Fertilizers Act & Fertilizers Regulations, Approval of plant material at the source does not preclude
rejection of non-conforming stock on the Site prior to, or after
• British Columbia Standard for Turfgrass Sod, and the planting.
• Silviculture Manual (Ministry of Forests, Lands, Natural Imported plant material shall be accompanied by all necessary
Resource Operations, and Rural Development). permits and import licences and shall conform to federal and
754.04 Guarantee/Maintenance provincial regulations.

754.04.01 Commencement – The Contractor shall guarantee It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all
and maintain all materials and quality of work for a period of regulations pertaining to the import of plant materials or their
one full year, commencing when the following conditions movement to or from a particular region of the province are
have been met: adhered to, and all inspection certificates required by the
Ministry of Agriculture are completed to the satisfaction of
(a) the supply and installation of all plant materials have that Ministry.
been completed as per SS 754.43,
754.12 Transporting Plants to Site
(b) all seeding/sodding has been completed (but is not
necessarily yet established), and 754.12.01 Dormant Period

(c) installation and hydrostatic testing of the irrigation (a) Deciduous: Bare Root Stock (only in dormant period):
system have been completed as per SS 766.42, and the Adequate protection shall be given in order to preserve
system is fully operational. moisture around the root system. For short transit period,
four hours or less, maximum temperature in the truck
754.04.02 Scope – The guarantee includes replacing all plants shall not be above 20°C. In all cases, at all times, roots
as determined by the Ministry Representative which are found should be protected from frost, wind and sun (e.g., a
dead or failing during the entire maintenance and guarantee closed van with wet straw or other suitable packing
period. Replacements shall be made immediately unless material protecting the roots). The temperature shall be
otherwise directed by the Ministry Representative, and maintained as uniformly as possible by mechanical
conditions of the guarantee shall apply to all replacement means, or in any event to prevent frost damage to roots.
seeding for one full growing season. The appropriate temperature range shall be between 1°C
and 10°C.

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (1 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 354 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

(b) Evergreens: It is recommended that root balls not be planted within three days, shall be stored in an upright
subjected to freezing temperatures below -5°C for a position in an area providing even light and offering
period longer than four hours. Plants shall be protected protection from wind and sun scald. Enough space shall be
to prevent desiccation by wind and sun. provided between plants so that light reaches all around to the
bottom of the plant in order to avoid leaf burning when
754.12.02 Non-Dormant period – Deciduous and Evergreen
planted out.
plant material shall be transported in a closed van or well-
covered truck with a tarp or similar material in order to protect (a) Sod – Sod shall be installed as soon as possible after
the leaves or needles from windburn. When in transit, with delivery. If there is a delay of more than 24 hours, the
protection of a tarp cover only, it is recommended that foliage sod shall be properly stored and kept moist and cool until
be sprayed with an antidesiccant. For the above material in it is placed. Sod shall not be stacked more than three
transit for more than three days, it shall be unloaded and then levels high while being stored.
stored away from direct sun for 24 hours to avoid leaf
(b) Balled and Burlapped Material – Special attention
burning.
shall be given to the root ball, and unless weather is rainy
754.13 Unloading and Handling Procedures – Plants shall or cool, root balls shall be protected by covering with
be carefully handled to minimize disturbance to root systems material suitable to protect them from drying out (e.g.
and damage to stems and branches. Plants shall not be sawdust, peat moss, topsoil). Plants intended to be
dropped to the ground when unloading. Plant material that is planted in the open shall not be kept stored in a building
mishandled and showing evidence of damage to root balls, or or any area of low light intensity for a period exceeding
undue damage and breakage to top growth will be rejected. seven days. All plants shall be kept well watered and
protected from heat and frost.
Plants are to be kept in a moist condition at all times. All
plants shall be well protected against physical damage and (c) Containerized Plants – In extreme weather, freezing or
desiccation until they are planted on the Site. high dry heat, the containers shall be buried in a
protective medium. Plants intended to be planted in the
754.13.01 B.R. (Bare Roots) Stock – Roots shall be covered
open shall not be kept stored in a building, truck or any
and protected immediately from frost, sun and wind.
area of low light intensity for a period exceeding seven
754.13.02 Stock in Pots/Containers – Shall be handled as days during the growing season.
much as possible by pots only in order to reduce breakage of
754.14.02 Storage During Dormant Period – Plants shall be
branches/leaves.
cared for according to each plant's requirement for winter
754.13.03 Balled & Burlapped (B & B) Material – Plants protection, and according to geographical location.
shall be handled by holding the root ball and supporting the
754.15 Plant Material
stem to minimize disturbance to the root ball and damage to
stems and branches. 754.15.01 Species – Selection of species shall be as specified.
Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to obtain the
754.13.04 Material in Wire Basket – Specimen trees shall
plant material specified. Where evidence is submitted that a
be lifted and supported by the wire basket and not by the
specified plant cannot be obtained, substitutions in kind, size
trunk.
and grade shall be made upon written approval by the
All plants shall be promptly unloaded, and their condition Ministry Representative.
checked immediately upon arrival. Watering shall be
754.15.02 Origin and Requirements – All plant material
provided as required and necessary pruning of minor
shall be nursery grown stock or approved collected native
breakage on branches performed.
plants unless specified otherwise. Plant material will be
754.13.05 Protection Against Stem and Branch Damage – inspected by the Ministry Representative upon delivery to the
During loading, transportation, off-loading and planting, all Site.
trees shall be protected against damage to stems and branches.
All nursery grown plants shall, as a minimum, comply with
This applies particularly to larger wire-basketed trees.
the Canadian Nursery Landscape Association Specification
Bark shall be protected against chafing and cuts by providing “Canadian Nursery Stock Standard” with respect to sizing,
a wrapping of cardboard, sackcloth or other material as grading and quality.
appropriate and when required.
Plants shall be true to name, type and form and shall be
754.13.06 Sod – Sod shall be protected during transportation representative of their species and variety.
to prevent drying out and shall arrive at the site in a fresh and
All plants shall be sturdy stock, with tree and shrub heights
healthy condition.
proportional to trunk caliper, overall plant width and size of
754.14 Storage root ball, as determined by the Ministry Representative.
Plants that are weak and thin, and those showing effects of
754.14.01 Storage During Growing Season – All plants in
containers, balled and burlapped, or in wire basket, if not

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (2 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 355 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

being grown too closely together or poorly maintained, will Collected plant stock shall be appropriately labeled with
not be accepted. weather proof tags for easy identification at the job site.
Plants shall be vigorous and healthy with normal, well 754.15.05 Seed – Seed quality and type shall conform to that
developed branches and good fibrous root systems and be free specified in the Special Provisions.
from decay, physical injury, disease and insect damage and
All other requirements are per SS 757 Revegetation Seeding.
infestation.
754.15.06 Sod – Sod shall be nursery grown, true to type and
In particular, conifers shall have a healthy, single leader with
conform to the British Columbia Standard for Turfgrass Sod,
well shaped whorls of vigorous, newly growing branches and
and the general requirements of the Canadian Nursery Stock
shall exhibit natural growth habit characteristic of the species
Standard.
and variety. Trees sheared as Christmas trees are not
acceptable. Sod grade shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
The root balls of dug material and the soil of containerized 754.16 Water – Water shall be clean and potable and shall be
plants shall be free from pernicious perennial weeds. All supplied by the Contractor.
balled and burlapped plant stock shall be supplied in
biodegradable root ball sacking. 754.17 Fertilizer – Fertilizer shall comply with the provisions
of the Canada Fertilizers Act and Fertilizer Regulations.
The search area for plants shall include, but not necessarily be Fertilizer shall be supplied to the specifications in the Special
limited to, the provinces of British Columbia, Alberta and the Provisions.
states of Washington, Oregon, California (northern portion),
Idaho and Montana. All plant material being sourced from 754.18 Bark Mulch – Bark mulch shall be sized 25 mm and
milder areas shall be properly “hardened off” prior to shipping minus, Douglas Fir or Hemlock bark chips and fines, or a
combination of both types and of the quality used for
and planting.
decorative landscape mulching purposes. It should be free of
754.15.03 Nursery Grown Stock – All plants specified chunks and sticks, dark brown in colour and free of all soil,
"Container" shall be grown for the length of time necessary to stones, roots or other extraneous matter.
permit the roots to fill and hold the soil within the container,
754.19 Backfill Topsoil – Backfill topsoil for planting
as required by the Canadian Standards for Nursery Stock.
operations shall conform to the requirements of SS 751 –
Similarly, all field dug material will show evidence of having Topsoil and Landscape Grading.
been root pruned to encourage fibrous root system
754.20 Other Materials – When required, various other
development and resulting in root balls that retain their
materials such as soil amendments, erosion control products,
integrity during handling.
hydraulic mulches, etc. shall be supplied to the specifications
Forestry seedlings shall be supplied and handled in in the Special Provisions.
accordance with the requirements of the Silvicultural Manual,
Ministry of Forests, Lands, Natural Resource Operations, and
Rural Development, Province of B.C.. CONSTRUCTION
All plant material shall be appropriately identified and 754.31 Scheduling – Work shall be scheduled to meet the
individually labelled with weatherproof tags. In the case of milestone dates provided in the Special Provisions, and to
small containerized plants such as ground covers and bundled ensure its execution meets the requirements of living plant
bare root seedlings, which are supplied in large numbers, material.
labelling shall be limited to identification of group lots as
permitted by the Ministry Representative. The work shall be co-ordinated with the schedule of other
trades and be well integrated with other specific requirements
754.15.04 Collected Plant Stock – The Contractor shall such as Sediment and Drainage Management Drawings,
provide either permits or verification that permission was which may be provided for any given project.
obtained for collecting native and/or introduced plant
materials. Information shall be supplied on where, when and 754.32 Pre-planting Operations – The plant material shall
how collection was made. be approved by the Ministry Representative prior to
installation. The Contractor shall ensure that all requirements
All collected plant material shall have been grown and of SS 754.11 through SS 754.15 have been met and that any
maintained in a nursery environment for a minimum of one minor damage to plant stock is taken care of through
growing season, unless, at the sole discretion of the Ministry appropriate pruning or other measure. When directed by the
Representative, certain species are approved for a lesser Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall apply anti-
period of time. As for nursery grown stock, collected plants desiccant to large conifers and deciduous trees that are in leaf.
shall be held long enough prior to planting to allow roots to Application will be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
fill the container or the dug root ball and to retain the soil instructions for the particular product.
within.

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (3 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 356 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

All invasive plants on site shall be removed or controlled prior be excavated and prepared to allow the following depth
to planting, seeding or installation of sod. of topsoil backfill underneath and around the root ball:
754.33 Location of Planting – Locations, quantities and (i) For plants up to and including 27 cm (#5) pot size –
spacing of trees, shrubs, vines and groundcovers as shown on not less than 300 mm
the Drawings shall be considered approximate and may be
(ii) For plants up to 45 cm pot size – not less than
adjusted by the Ministry Representative to meet field and
450 mm
recommended micro-site conditions as specified in the
Silviculture Manual. Tree numbers, spacings and locations (iii) For tree root balls larger than 45 cm – not less than
will vary according to the Site conditions and amenities. The 600 mm
Contractor may adjust plantings to meet field conditions, with
(c) Severely Compacted Conditions – If severely
the approval of the Ministry Representative. Locations shall
compacted conditions are encountered, and surface or
be staked as shown on the Drawings and verified on Site with
ground water entering the excavations does not drain, the
the Ministry Representative prior to planting. If underground
obstructions are uncovered, they shall be reported to Ministry Contractor shall correct the problem by:
Representative for resolution. (i) providing a means of sub-surface drainage;
754.34 Area Preparation (ii) utilizing elevated planting techniques where some of
the planting soil will be placed into a partial
754.34.01 Finish Grade Preparation – The Contractor shall
excavation and the remainder on the surface to meet
verify that grades are correct. If discrepancies occur, the
Ministry Representative shall be notified, and work shall be the depth requirement for growing medium; or
halted until otherwise instructed by the Ministry (iii) considering alternate planting sites.
Representative.
These alternatives shall receive prior approval by the
754.34.02 Planting Beds and Grass Areas – Prepare Ministry Representative, as applicable to the Site.
planting beds and grass areas in accordance with SS 751 –
Topsoil and Landscape Grading. 754.35 Time of Planting – All planting operations shall be
performed during the normal planting season for each type of
754.34.03 Planting Holes – Planting holes shall be dug in material, and within the milestone dates provided in the
accordance with the specific requirements described below. Special Provisions, unless otherwise authorized in writing.
The bottom of planting holes shall be scarified and loosened During the specified timeframe, planting operations shall, as
to a depth of 100 mm prior to placement of plants and backfill far as practicable, take advantage of soil and weather
soil. conditions favourable to the work. Late spring or early fall
planting is recommended unless supplemental watering is
Subsoil, rocks, roots and extraneous material shall be
removed from excavated material that will be used as planting available.
backfill soil. Unsuitable or excess material shall be disposed Planting shall occur when risk of frost or snowfall is minimal.
of. Planting into frozen ground is not acceptable.
Holes dug by a mechanical tree spade shall have their sides 754.36 Planting Procedures – Trees and Shrubs
scarified to loosen any compaction glazing caused by the
blades. Planting holes shall be tested by filling with water. 754.36.01 General Procedure – Plants shall be installed so
Inadequate drainage conditions permitting the retention of that after settlement they will be at the same planting depth
water in planting pits for more than 12 hours shall be reported they were at in the field or in containers. The soil mark on the
to the Ministry Representative before proceeding with the stem is an indication of this, and it shall be flush with the
work. finished level allowing for settling of the topsoil after planting
and settlement. The entire root ball shall be covered with
(a) Free Draining Sub-Grade: Where the subgrade and growing medium.
existing native surface soils are of good drainage and of
a non-compacted nature, planting holes shall be Once the bottom of the planting hole is scarified and the initial
excavated and prepared to allow the following depth of lift of backfill topsoil is placed, the holes shall be pre-watered
topsoil backfill underneath and around the root ball: and allowed to drain prior to installation of plant material.

(i) For plants up to and including 27 cm (#5) pot size – Plants shall be set plumb in the planting beds or in the centre
not less than 150 mm. of the pits except where the plant's character requires variation
from this.
(ii) For plants larger than 27 cm (#5) pot size – not less
than 300 mm. The growing medium shall be placed in layers around the
roots or ball, preferably by hand. Each layer shall be firmed
(b) Poor Draining Sub Grade: Where the subgrade and to eliminate air void and ensure good soil contact with the
existing native surface soils are of poor texture and roots. The process shall be carried out carefully to avoid
conditions are generally compacted, planting holes shall injuring the roots or ball or disturbing the position of the plant.

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (4 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 357 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

Trees requiring staking shall have support stakes placed hardware required shall be installed without damage to
carefully between the roots before backfilling. Specifications plants.
for tree supports are described in SS 754.
Trees that are dislodged during the contract period shall
After the planting hole is filled with soil to ground level, the be uprighted and re-secured as required. Trees that are
plant shall receive a thorough watering. A final backfill layer damaged shall be replaced by the Contractor at the
shall be applied to form a saucer-like berm around the Contractor’s expense.
circumference of the planting hole in order to catch and hold
754.37 Seeding – Application of seed, fertilizer, and other
rainwater. This rain basin shall be maintained until final
materials shall be at the rates specified in the Special
acceptance of the work.
Provisions.
Once planting and mulching is complete, the Site shall be
The requirements for construction shall be in accordance with
cleaned of all excess soil, rock and debris.
SS 757 Revegetation Seeding.
754.36.02 Specific Planting Requirements:
754.38 Sodding – The required fertilizer shall be applied at
(a) Bare Root Stock – The roots of bare root plant material the rates specified in the Special Provisions and worked well
shall be soaked in water prior to planting. During into the topsoil prior to laying the sod.
installation, the plant roots shall be evenly spread out
Sod shall be laid within 24 hours after delivery unless proper
over a cone of soil in the bottom of the hole, and the plant
storage arrangements can be made.
supported to the correct depth as backfilling takes place.
The plant shall be gently shaken in a vertical motion to The sections of sod shall be laid close together with joints
ensure that soil particles sift into the root system and staggered. No open joints are to be visible, and no pieces are
establish close contact with the roots. to overlap.
(b) Container Stock – Non-perishable, impervious Sod shall be laid smooth and flush with the adjoining grass
containers such as plastic pots and tubs shall be removed areas, adjacent hard surfacing, and the tops of curbs and
from plants before planting. Once plants are removed planting bed liners, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
from these containers, root systems shall not be disturbed All necessary cutting shall be done using sharp implements.
with the exception of unraveling any roots starting to
spiral around the root ball. On slopes of approximately 2.5 to 1 and steeper, the sod shall
be laid lengthwise across the slope, and the material secured
Bio-degradable containers such as peat or paper fibre with wooden stakes driven flush with the sod at intervals not
pots shall not be removed before planting but shall be exceeding 0.5 metres. There shall be at least three stakes per
thoroughly soaked with water prior to placement in the individual sod piece. On slopes of gradients between 2.5 and
holes. This will ensure that containers absorb subsequent 1.5 to 1, the bottom three rows of sod and every third
watering and not repel it due to the presence of a dry subsequent row shall be secured with stakes. For slopes
barrier. The rim of such containers shall be not be steeper than 1.5 to 1, every sod course shall be staked. Stakes
exposed to the air, and when necessary, shall be removed shall be removed before pedestrian traffic is permitted on the
after planting. sod.
(c) Balled and Burlapped Stock – When backfill soil is Sodded areas shall be rolled or suitably tamped to ensure a
placed to approximately two-thirds of the root ball good bond with the topsoil, and then subsequently protected
height, the ties on the sacking shall be cut and the top from heavy foot traffic or equipment travel.
portion of the burlap folded back carefully to avoid
Unless otherwise indicated, sodded areas shall be evenly
disturbing the integrity of the root ball. The sacking shall
watered within 12 hours of installation, and with sufficient
not be removed. The remainder of the hole will then be
quantity to saturate the grass and the upper portion of the
backfilled and firmed.
topsoil.
Where wire baskets are used to encase and support the
root ball of supplied plant material, these shall not be 754.39 Watering – All trees, shrubs, groundcovers, vines,
and designated grass areas, shall be watered immediately after
removed. The top of the wire basket shall be cut away or
planting, and regular watering shall continue as required for
completely folded back and buried without disturbing the
plant health until final acceptance of the work.
integrity of the root ball.
754.40 Pruning – Pruning shall be limited to the minimum
(d) Forestry Seedlings – Planting of forestry seedlings shall
necessary to remove dead or injured tissue and branches
be in accordance with the Silviculture Manual.
interfering with desirable growth habit and overall health of
(e) Tree Support – All trees of a size requiring staking or the plant.
guy wiring shall be supported in accordance with the
Pruning shall be done in accordance with proper horticultural
details and instructions provided on Drawings SP754-04
practice, using clean, sharp tools appropriate to the task and
through SP754-07 of these Standard Specifications. All
in a manner that preserves the natural character of the plant.

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (5 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 358 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

754.41 Mulching – When specified in the Drawings and 754.71.01 Maintenance Operations
Special Provisions, individual tree pits and planting beds shall
(a) When specified, water shall be applied in sufficient
be mulched.
quantity and by appropriate method to maintain optimum
Mulching of tree pits and planting beds shall be carried out soil moisture conditions for healthy plant establishment,
after watering, to an even depth of 50 mm after settlement, without causing surface soil erosion.
unless otherwise specified on the Drawings and in the Special
(b) Invasive plant and weed control will be carried out, as
Provisions.
required, to prevent competition with establishing
754.42 Clean-up – All plant containers and waste materials planted material and to maintain the aesthetic appearance
resulting from landscaping and planting operations shall be of landscaped areas. Invasive plants must be removed
removed from the Site and appropriately disposed of. completely, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Provisions or otherwise directed by the Ministry
754.43 Conditions for Acceptance – The Contractor shall
Representative. The presence of other weedy species in
ensure that the following conditions are met for all planted
plantation beds, individual planting pits, and designated
and grassed areas.
lawn areas, is limited to a maximum of 5% of the surface
751.43.01 Conditions area at any given time, unless otherwise stated in the
Special Provisions or otherwise directed by the Ministry
(a) Topsoil quality, fertility levels, depths and surface
Representative. The use of herbicides for the control of
conditions are as set out in the Drawings and
invasive plants must be approved by the Ministry
Specifications; Representative prior to use, and must be conducted under
(b) All plants are of the species and varieties specified and a confirmed Integrated Pest Management Plan, in
planted in the locations shown on Drawings; accordance with the Integrated Pest Management Act and
associated Regulations, and must be completed by a
(c) All plants are healthy and growing vigorously. Seeded Certified Pesticide Applicator. The use of herbicides for
grass areas are sufficiently established into the control of other non-invasive weedy species is not
underlying growing medium, are free of thin and bare permitted.
patches, free of invasive plants, and are relatively free of
other weedy species: not more than 5% in lawn areas, and (c) Mowing shall be carried out at regular intervals, as
not more than 15% in rough grass areas; required, to maintain grass in the areas designated, and at
the height(s) specified in the Special Provisions. Edges
(d) The water content in the topsoil, i.e. – when irrigation is of areas designated “Lawn” shall be neatly trimmed.
provided, is to the satisfaction of the Ministry Excess clippings shall be removed immediately after
Representative; mowing and trimming.
(e) Trees are supported, as specified; (d) Fertility levels in planted and grassed areas shall be
(f) Pruning is complete, in accordance with proper maintained in accordance with the requirements of the
horticultural practice and to the satisfaction of the plant material.
Ministry Representative; (e) Bark Mulch shall be maintained to the specified depth.
(g) All planting beds and tree pits are free of invasive plants (f) For non-mulched areas, the soil surface shall be
and other weedy species; cultivated, as required, to keep it loose and friable.
(h) Mulch is in place, as required; (g) Establishment pruning to encourage proper shape and
(i) Unmulched areas are cultivated to leave a loose, friable, health of plants by removing dead or broken and
water-permeable surface, and; interfering branches and diseased or damaged tissue.
(j) Maintenance procedures set out in SS 754.71 have been (h) Maintenance of tree stakes, guy wires and tree ties to
carried out. prevent plant dislodgement and damage to trunk and
branches.
(i) All plant material shall be alive and maintained in a
MAINTENANCE healthy growing condition during the entire
754.71 Maintenance – The following maintenance establishment period. Plant material which has died or is
operations shall be performed from the time of landscape not healthy, and in the opinion of the Ministry
installation, until the earlier of the Actual Completion Date Representative, does not perform its function, will be
and expiry of the landscape maintenance period as defined in removed and replaced by the Contractor at the earliest
the contract documents. opportunity, weather and season permitting. Grassed
areas that show deterioration or bare spots shall be
repaired immediately. Unless otherwise directed by the
Ministry Representative, all repair and/or replacement

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (6 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 359 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

shall be in accordance with the original specifications and called for, and shall constitute full compensation for
requirements. supplying and delivering plants; for supplying and delivering
topsoil for plant backfill, fertilizer and all incidental materials;
for digging holes for plants; for planting, pruning, staking and
MEASUREMENT guying, mulching, rain basin formation, clean up after
planting and maintenance of plants; and for all labour,
754.81 Planting – The unit of measurement for plants will
equipment and tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
generally be PER PLANT, unless otherwise specified in the
work prescribed in this Section.
Special Provisions.
Payment for SEEDING and SODDING will be at the contract
754.82 Seeding and Sodding – The unit of measurement for
unit price bid per square metre. The unit price shall be full
seeded and sodded areas will generally be by the SQUARE
compensation for work described and all work subsidiary and
METRE, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
incidental thereto for which separate payment is not
754.83 Mulch – The unit of measurement for supply and elsewhere provided.
installation of bark mulch will generally be by the SQUARE Payment for MULCHING will be at the contract unit price
METRE for the stipulated mulch thickness, unless otherwise bid per square metre. The unit price bid for mulching shall be
specified in the Special Provisions. full compensation for all labour and equipment required for
supplying and spreading of the mulch and for all incidental
work not required to be separately paid for.
PAYMENT
754.91 General – Payment for plants will be at the contract
unit prices bid for PLANTING of the types, species and sizes

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (7 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 360 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (8 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 361 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (9 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 362 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (10 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 363 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (11 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 364 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (12 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 365 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (13 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 366 of 452
SECTION 754 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 754 (14 of 14)


Vol. 2 Page 367 of 452
SECTION 757

REVEGETATION SEEDING

DESCRIPTION to wildlife shall not be included unless specified by the


Contract.
757.01 Scope – This Section refers to those portions of the
work that are unique to the supply and application of seed, 757.12.03 Seed Analysis Report – The Contractor shall
fertilizer, mulch, tackifier, and other materials used for provide valid Certificates of Seed Analysis for each species
revegetating disturbed areas, and that are not designated for and seed lot to be used in a mix at least five working days
treatment under SS 754 Planting of Trees, Shrubs, and prior to the desired blending of mixes and shipping of the
Ground Covers or SS 751 Topsoil and Landscape Grading. seed from the seed supplier to the Contractor, for the
This Section must be referenced and interpreted approval by the Ministry Representative. The Certificates
simultaneously with all other Sections pertinent to the of Seed Analysis shall set out details of the seed as specified
works described herein. in the Canada Seeds Act and shall be completely free of any
noxious weeds listed on the Weed Control Regulation, any
757.02 References
BC proposed prohibited species, any sweet clover and any
• BC Hydro Electrical safety resources, other undesirable contaminants indicated in the Contract.
• Canada Seeds Act & Seeds Regulations, The Ministry Representative will review the Certificates of
Seed Analysis and, if the specifications are met, give the
• Weed Control Act & Weed Control Regulation, Contractor approval to proceed with blending and seed use.
and
757.12.04 Packaging and Labelling – Seed shall be
• Canada Fertilizers Act & Fertilizers Regulations supplied in the original sealed packages, with legible labels
757.11 Handling and Storage – All hydraulic or rolled securely attached, and providing the following information:
erosion control products, seed, mulch, fertilizers and other • Supplier’s name and address
dry materials shall be stored in a dry, weather proof storage
place and shall be protected from damage by heat, moisture, • Analysis of seed mixture – the grade, and the name and
weather, excessive temperatures, rodents, construction percentage by weight of individual seed species
operations, or other causes until the time of seeding. All • Percentage of Pure Live Seed (PLS) for each species
manufacturer’s instructions regarding storage, handling,
blending and installation shall be adhered to unless • Lot number and crop year for each species in the mix
otherwise specified by the Contract. Supplier labels or other • Net weight (mass)
identification are not to be removed or defaced.
• Date and location of packaging
757.12 Seed
757.13 Fertilizer – Fertilizer shall comply with the
757.12.01 Supply of Seed – All seed specified shall be provisions of the Canada Fertilizer Act and Seeds
supplied by the Contractor and obtained from a recognized Regulations. Fertilizer shall be supplied as noted on
source. Table 757-A unless otherwise specified in the Special
757.12.02 Seed Type and Grade – All seed supplied either Provisions. All fertilizer shall be a coated, slow release
as individual species, or as a seed mix, shall comply with Nitrogen type formulation.
the requirements of the Canada Seed Act and Seeds 757.14 Hydraulic Erosion Control Products (HECPs) –
Regulations, and the grade standards for that particular crop HECPs shall either be a 100% wood fibre type or be listed
kind. Grass seed shall meet or exceed Common No. 1 grade on the Ministry’s Recognized Products List. HECPs shall be
prior to mixing with other species. Seed shall be free of manufactured, degradable, pre-packaged fibrous materials
propagules of plant species designated as noxious under the specifically designed for hydraulic application.
Weed Control Act & Weed Control Regulation, any BC
Proposed Prohibited Species, any sweet clover and any HECPs shall be supplied in weather resistant packages
other undesirable contaminants indicated in the Contract. bearing the manufacturer’s label, clearly indicating the
weight and product name, and shall be protected following
Seed mixes used for general roadside revegetation, and for the manufacturer’s recommendations and protected from
the general conditions and areas indicated, shall be as shown climatic conditions, including excessive sunlight to avoid
on Table 757-A unless otherwise specified in the Special packaging deterioration
Provisions. When specified, specialized seed mixes, or forb,
shrub or tree seed shall be supplied to the requirements of The fibres shall be dyed green with a water-soluble non-
the Special Provisions. Legumes and other species palatable toxic dye that will not stain masonry, concrete, asphalt or

BC MoTI SS 2020 757 (1 of 8)


Vol. 2 Page 368 of 452
SECTION 757 REVEGETATION SEEDING

painted surfaces, and shall be non-toxic to plant or animal 757.17.02 Biotic Soil Media (BSM) - Where specified for
life. use, the BSM shall be designed as an alternative to topsoil
and/or compost to accelerate development of depleted
757.15 Tackifier – Tackifier shall be an organic guar gum
soils/substrates with low organic matter, low nutrient levels
or starch base product specifically designed for use with
and limited biological activity. BSM products used must be
HECPs and/or seeding operations. If supplied separately
non-toxic with fibers that have been phytosanitized to
with a mulch product, the tackifier shall be supplied in
eliminate potential weed seeds and pathogens - prior to the
packages bearing the manufacturer’s label, clearly
introduction of soil building components. BSM products
indicating product name, content, and application
shall not be used for erosion control and shall be applied to
instructions.
enhance vegetation establishment and growth only. Where
HECPs may contain a pre-mixed tackifier, which shall erosion control is required, the BSM shall be hydraulically
adhere to mulch to prevent separation during shipment and installed in a two-phase process with the BSM installed first
to avoid chemical agglomeration during mixing in hydraulic with the seed, then covered with the mulch and tackifier or
mulching equipment. Mulch and tackifier combination BFM product. BSM products may also be applied by hand
products must be premixed and bagged by the manufacturer in conjunction with broadcast seeding.
to ensure quality control.
757.16 Water – Water used for hydraulic seeding
EQUIPMENT
operations shall be free of impurities that would inhibit
germination and growth or may be harmful to the 757.21 General – Equipment used shall be capable of
environment. Unless otherwise noted in the Special applying the materials listed in the Special Provisions
Provisions, the Contractor shall be responsible for securing uniformly over the designated areas.
a water source for hydraulic application of materials,
Equipment shall not cause soil rutting or other site damage.
including obtaining use permits under the Water Act if
water is to be drawn from waterbodies, and for all cost to 757.22 Hydraulic Seeding/Mulching Equipment –
supply. Obtaining water from waterbodies without use Equipment shall have the tank volume identified by an
permits is not permissible. identification plate or sticker, which shall be affixed in plain
view.
757.17 Other Materials – Where steep slopes, poor soils or
sensitive areas exist, specialized HECPs including Bonded The hydraulic machine shall be capable of sufficient
Fiber Matrix (BFM) products, Soil Amendments, including agitation to mix the materials into a homogenous slurry, and
Biotic Soil Media (BSM) and other materials including to maintain the slurry in a homogeneous state until and
Rolled Erosion Control Products (RECPs) may be specified during application.
in the Contract. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract or
Equipment shall be adequately sized to the task, to complete
approved by the Ministry Representative, installation shall
be in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s rates and/or work efficiently within the time frame specified, and to
instructions for the slope and site. permit application of materials without excess water being
applied, or undue time lapse between operations. Hydraulic
Bonded Fiber Matrix coverings, erosion control blankets, machines should be capable of producing slurry viscosities
soil amendments and other materials shall be supplied to the containing approximately 18 to 30 kg of mulch per
specifications in the Special Provisions. 500 litres of water.
757.17.01 Bonded Fiber Matrix (BFM) Products - Where Extension hoses or pipes shall be provided to reach areas
specified in the Contract, all hydraulically applied BFM not accessible from the hydraulic seeder.
products used shall be designed to bond with the soil surface
and create a continuous, porous, absorbent and flexible
erosion resistant mat to all disturbed areas. The BFM CONSTRUCTION
product shall be designed to stand up to multiple rainfall
events for reliable erosion protection for a minimum of 6 757.31 Scheduling – Work shall be scheduled to ensure a
months. minimum duration of on-Site storage of materials,
minimum compaction of topsoil, and prompt
The BFM product shall be composed of sterilized wood seeding/mulching operations.
fibers and may contain organic guar gum or starch base
tackifiers in addition to the proprietary components or be The work shall be coordinated with the schedule of other
listed on the Ministry’s Recognized Products List. All trades, and be well integrated with specific requirements
components of the BFM product shall be 100% such as Sediment and Drainage Management Plans and best
biodegradable, non-toxic to plant or animal life and shall not practices, which may be provided for any given project.
form a water-impermeable crust or otherwise inhibit plant 757.32 Protection – Existing Site equipment, roadways,
growth. landscaping, reference points, monuments, markers,
utilities, and structures shall be protected from damage by

BC MoTI SS 2020 757 (2 of 8)


Vol. 2 Page 369 of 452
SECTION 757 REVEGETATION SEEDING

hydraulic application method. No overspray is to occur into 757.38 Application Method for Mechanical Drop or
waterbodies or environmentally sensitive areas. When Broadcast Dry Seeding – Seed shall be applied in two
necessary to ensure protection of these areas, dry, hand intersecting directions, and overlap adjoining ground cover
broadcasting of materials will be employed. by 300 mm except where conditions dictate seeding in one
direction only.
Areas treated with HECPs shall be protected from foot and
vehicle traffic, grazing and other disturbances. Any Dry seeding must occur during spring or fall timing
damaged areas that result in disturbance of the continuous windows and shall be installed at a rate of 30kg/ha. Seed
mat of HECP materials and exposed soil shall be repaired shall be raked or rolled into the soil after sowing, and where
within 24 hours of notification of the damage. necessary, may be covered with a layer of thin and
continuous layer of straw to help protect the seed from
757.33 Substrate and Seedbed Preparation - Prior to
wildlife and prevent erosion
installation of HECPs, the Contractor will all ensure all
slopes are geotechnically stable and have been designed to 757.39 Hydraulic Application of Materials
divert runoff away from the face of the slope where
757.39.01 General – The hydraulic machine shall be
required. All pre-existing rills or gullies shall be repaired
operated in compliance with Ministry safety standards
prior to installation, and slopes shall be suitably roughened
including those detailed in the BC Hydro Electrical safety
to the Ministry Representative’s satisfaction. Slopes shall
resources and the Ministry`s Traffic Management Manual
not be left in a smooth or glazed condition that functions to
for Work on Roadways.
prevent water and plant root infiltration. Slope roughening
techniques may include, but not be limited to, track walking, Materials shall not be sprayed on objects not expected to
imprinting, harrowing, or placement of woody debris. support plant growth. Existing Site equipment, roadways,
Indentations must be horizontally installed to the slope landscaping, reference points, monuments, markers,
rather than vertically, to ensure they function to trap water utilities, and structures shall be protected from damage by
and seed rather than accelerate erosion. Any slope hydraulic application method. No overspray is to occur into
interruption devices specified shall be correctly installed waterbodies or environmentally sensitive areas. HECPs are
prior to application of the HECP. not intended to be applied in channels, swales, or other areas
where concentrated flows are anticipated unless installed in
757.34 Timing of Material Application – Material
conjunction with RECPs. When necessary to introduce
application shall be carried out in accordance with the
vegetation to these areas, dry, hand broadcasting of
construction schedule and shall occur as soon as possible
materials shall be employed.
following the disturbance. Reseeding during extreme
drought or heat may result in failure and should be avoided. The Contractor shall be responsible for any overspray or
Hydraulically applied erosion control products shall not be damages incurred during hydroseeding. Any overspray or
applied to saturated soils or substrates, and shall not be damage shall be made good at no cost, to the satisfaction of
installed immediately before, during, or after rainfall, such the Ministry Representative.
that the slurry will have opportunity to dry for up to 24 hours
757.39.02 Mixing – The required quantities of seed,
after installation, unless otherwise approved by the Ministry
fertilizer, mulch, tackifier and other material shall be
Representative or permitted by the Manufacturer’s
charged into the tank accurately by weight or by an
specifications for the product being used.
acceptable system of mass calibrated volume measurement,
757.35 Methods – The methods chosen for material following the manufacturer’s specifications.
application shall be at the Contractor’s discretion, unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. The materials shall be thoroughly mixed into homogeneous
water slurry for a minimum of 10 minutes prior to
757.36 Rates of Application – Unless otherwise specified application for each load.
by the manufacturer, standard material application rates for
All seed shall be added last when mixing. Pellet inoculated
mulch and tackifier shown in Table 757-A shall be
seed shall be applied immediately after placement into tank,
followed. Fertilizer shall be applied as recommended by
soil testing or following Table 757-A. Site conditions and if this is not possible, dry application methods must be
including allowances for increased surface area due to used. Other seed shall not be left in the tank for
unreasonable lengths of time prior to application, i.e. –
roughening or scarification during substrate and seedbed
exceeding one or two hours, particularly when in contact
preparation shall be taken into account when determining
with fertilizer solution.
quantities of materials required to reach the specified
application rates. Application rate may need to be increased The Ministry Representative will determine if Seed that
by up to 20% for tracked surfaces. remains in the tank for periods longer than specified can be
757.37 Record of Application – The Contractor shall used. Rejected seed shall be replenished with fresh stock.
maintain a record of all pertinent application information on 757.39.03 Application – HECPs shall be applied to form an
the form accepted by the Ministry Representative. Refer to even, uniform mat blended 150 mm into adjacent vegetated
Figure 757-1. areas or previous mulch applications. HECPs shall be

BC MoTI SS 2020 757 (3 of 8)


Vol. 2 Page 370 of 452
SECTION 757 REVEGETATION SEEDING

applied from opposing directions to achieve soil coverage 757.43 Guarantee & Repairs – The Contractor shall
except where conditions dictate seeding in one direction restore disturbed areas beyond the cut slopes at the direction
only. of the Ministry Representative. Seeded areas that show thin
application or bare spots shall be re-treated with the
757.40 Related Work – Additional related work such as the
specified materials at the earliest opportunity, weather and
application of Rolled Erosion Control Products (RECPs),
season permitting. No additional payment will be made for
compost blankets, or other coverings, and harrowing or
the repairs.
discing of soil following material application, shall be as
specified in the Special Provisions and be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
MEASUREMENT
757.41 Clean-up – All surplus and waste materials resulting
757.81 General – Revegetation Seeding shall be measured
from seeding operations shall be removed from the job site
by the area treated, to the nearest tenth of a hectare (0.1 ha).
after empty product containers have been inspected by the
The treated areas will be calculated by actual measurement
Ministry Representative.
along the slope, and within the right-of-way, or as directed
Hydraulic seeding and/or mulching overspray that may by the Ministry Representative.
cause problems on areas or objects not designated for re-
vegetation shall be removed in an appropriate manner.
PAYMENT
757.42 Conditions for Acceptance –Treated areas will be
accepted by the Ministry when the following conditions 757.91 General – Payment for REVEGETATION
have been met. SEEDING will be at the Unit Price per hectare bid for
"Revegetation Seeding" in Schedule 7, as measured in
757.42.01 Conditions
place. The Contract Unit Price shall be accepted as full
(a) Treated areas are not thin with bare patches, or uneven compensation for the work described and all work
in distribution. subsidiary and incidental thereto for which separate
payment is not elsewhere provided.
(b) Empty containers of materials used during the work are
stored neatly on Site for inspection by the Ministry
Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 757 (4 of 8)


Vol. 2 Page 371 of 452
SECTION 757 REVEGETATION SEEDING

Figure 757-1: Daily Seeding / Application Record

o 2020 757 5 of 8
Vol. 2 Page 372 of 452
SECTION 757 REVEGETATION SEEDING

Table 757-A: Standard Grass Seed Mixes and Material Application Rates for Revegetation of British Columbia
Roadsides

Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, standard application rates are as follows:
• Grass seed Mix 75 kg/ha
• Nurse Crop Grass (when specified)
o Fall Rye 50 kg/ha
o Axcella Annual Rye 25 kg/ha
• Fertilizer 300 kg/ha
• Wood Fibre Mulch 1500 kg/ha
• Tackifier Per Manufacturer’s Instructions

Where seeding for landscaped or turfgrass areas is required, the mixture shall be of turf-type: Perennial ryegrass, Kentucky
bluegrass, and Red Fescue, unless otherwise specified. Turfgrass mix shall be composed of any two or more of the above
species mixed in combinations such that no single kind constitutes more than 75% of the grass in the turf.

Fertilizer N-P-K proportions shall be as recommended by soil testing (preferred), or following Table 757-A.

Average annual precipitation values may be found on-line, including from Environment Canada at:
• http://climate.weather.gc.ca/climate_normals/index_e.html
• http://climate.weather.gc.ca/historical_data/search_historic_data_e.html

Standard Mixes
Climatic Area Application
(by weight)
South Coast Vancouver Island / Coast Mix
Canada bluegrass 5%
Creeping red fescue 29% General seeding coastal locations where mean annual
Hard fescue/Sheep fescue 17% precipitation is > 90 cm.
Perennial ryegrass 37%
Fertilizer: 16-32-6, or pre-approved equivalent
Redtop 3%
Timothy 9%

Interior Forestland Mix


Annual ryegrass 11%
Canada bluegrass 3% General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
Hard fescue/Sheep fescue 13% > 50 cm.
Intermediate wheatgrass 50%
Fertilizer: 16-32-6, or pre-approved equivalent
Perennial ryegrass 22%
Redtop 1%

Interior Dryland Mix


Crested Wheatgrass 40% General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
Hard Fescue 15% < 30 cm.
Slender Wheatgrass 20%
Fertilizer: 16-32-6, or pre-approved equivalent
Tall Wheatgrass 25%

BC MoTI SS 2020 757 (6 of 8)


Vol. 2 Page 373 of 452
SECTION 757 REVEGETATION SEEDING

Standard Mixes
Climatic Area Application
(by weight)
Thompson – Interior Forestland Mix
Okanagan Annual ryegrass 11%
Canada bluegrass 3% General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
Hard fescue/Sheep fescue 13% > 50 cm.
Intermediate wheatgrass 50%
Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent
Perennial ryegrass 22%
Redtop 1%

Interior Dryland Mix


Crested Wheatgrass 40% General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
Hard Fescue 15% < 30 cm.
Slender Wheatgrass 20%
Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent
Tall Wheatgrass 25%

Alkaline Tolerant Blend


Canada Bluegrass 15%
General seeding in alkaline soils.
Crested Wheatgrass 35%
Hard Fescue 25% Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent
Sherman Big Bluegrass 25%

Kootenays Interior Forestland Mix


Annual ryegrass 11%
Canada bluegrass 3% General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
Hard fescue/Sheep fescue 13% > 50 cm.
Intermediate wheatgrass 50%
Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent
Perennial ryegrass 22%
Redtop 1%

Kootenay Dryland
Canada bluegrass 3%
General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
Crested wheatgrass 24%
< 50 cm.
Hard fescue/Sheep fescue 13%
Redtop 1% Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent
Tall wheatgrass 59%

Northern North East General Mix


Creeping red fescue 25% General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
(Prince George Perennial ryegrass 30% > 50 cm.
Area) Tall fescue 30%
Fertilizer: 26-16-8, or pre-approved equivalent
Timothy 15%

North East Dryland Mix General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
Creeping red fescue 22% < 50 cm.
Crested wheatgrass 38%
Intermediate Wheatgrass 40%
Fertilizer: 26-16-8, or pre-approved equivalent

BC MoTI SS 2020 757 (7 of 8)


Vol. 2 Page 374 of 452
SECTION 757 REVEGETATION SEEDING

Standard Mixes
Climatic Area Application
(by weight)
Northern North West General Mix General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
Creeping red fescue 50% > 50 cm.
(Terrace Area) Timothy 8%
Kentucky bluegrass 7% For use in CWH and ICH biogeoclimatic zone.
Hard fescue/Sheep fescue 35% Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent

North West Dryland Mix General seeding inland where mean annual precipitation is
Intermediate wheatgrass 61% < 50 cm.
Crested wheatgrass 23%
For use in SBS biogeoclimatic zone (East of Moricetown to
Hard fescue/Sheep fescue 15%
West of Endako)
Kentucky bluegrass 1%
Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent
Northern Coastal Mix General seeding coastal locations where mean annual
Intermediate wheatgrass 52% precipitation is > 90 cm.
Kentucky bluegrass 12%
For use in CWH biogeoclimatic zone (QCI, Prince Rupert to
Hard fescue/Sheep fescue 27%
Pacific)
Timothy 9%
Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent
Northern Mix General seeding coastal locations where mean annual
Crested wheatgrass 35% precipitation is > 90 cm.
Creeping red fescue 35%
For use in ICH and BWBS biogeoclimatic zones.
Kentucky bluegrass 30%
• (ICH – Pacific to Moricetown, Kitwanga to Thomas
Creek 220 km N)
• (BWBS – Thomas Creek to Yukon border)
Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent
Ditch Vegetation Seed Mixture
Crested wheatgrass 67% For use in revegetating roadside ditches following ditch
Creeping meadow foxtail 8% maintenance operations.
Kentucky bluegrass 3%
Fertilizer: 22-11-11, or pre-approved equivalent
Tufted hairgrass 22%

Vancouver Vancouver Island / Coast Mix


Island Canada bluegrass 5%
Creeping red fescue 29% General seeding coastal locations where mean annual
Hard fescue/Sheep fescue 17% precipitation is > 90 cm.
Perennial ryegrass 37%
Fertilizer: 18-18-18
Redtop 3%
Timothy 9%

Riparian Areas Riparian Area Mix


Slender wheatgrass 40%
Perennial rye 25% General purpose for riparian or saturated soil areas
Kentucky bluegrass 15% throughout the Province.
Timothy 10%
Fertilizer: 18-18-18
Redtop 5%
Junegrass 5%

BC MoTI SS 2020 757 (8 of 8)


Vol. 2 Page 375 of 452
SECTION 766

IRRIGATION

DESCRIPTION operating instructions shall be Cerlox bound into a plastic


covered 8½” x 11” booklet.
766.01 Scope – The work consists of the supply of all
material, labour and equipment to install a complete and After the system has been completed, the Contractor shall
operating irrigation system as shown on the Drawings. The instruct the Ministry Representative's agent in the proper
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits use of the equipment.
required.
Completion will not be certified until adjustments and
766.02 References – Codes & Standards – In the absence drawings are approved.
of other instructions, the provisions of all the following
codes and standards shall apply:
MATERIALS
• The National Building Code of Canada;
766.11 General – Shipping, handling and installation of
• Current CSA Specifications for copper, steel and materials shall be to manufacturer's recommended
plastic pipe; instructions, and best work practice. Particular care shall be
• AWWA Specification, current editions. taken to avoid scratches and nicks on the plastic pipe. Pipe
must be properly stacked and stored in a clean place on the
766.03 Site Security – The Contractor shall be responsible Site, keeping dirt out of the pipe at all times.
for maintaining all security at the project Site at all times,
and shall ensure that no loss, damage or breakage occurs to 766.12 Pipes and Fittings – Galvanized pipe, Schedule 40,
stockpiled materials or to the partially installed irrigation with galvanized fittings, shall be used inside culverts. The
system. The Contractor shall make good all damage pipe shall be connected to the plastic main or lateral 450 mm
resulting from acts of vandalism throughout the period of clear of the culvert.
installation and subsequent maintenance. Plastic pipe shall be used for the submain and laterals of the
766.04 Electrical Trades – The Contractor shall contact the irrigation system. Plastic pipe shall be semi-rigid extruded
Electrical Trades Supervisor prior to performing work on from PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) resin, Type 1, grade 2,
any existing Ministry owned equipment. All AC electrical normal impact.
connections shall be done by a qualified electrician. The minimum classes to be used are listed in Table 766-A.
766.05 Drawings and Instructions – The Contractor shall Fittings shall be PVC plastic, Schedule 40 or 80, designed
install the irrigation system as shown and detailed on the for solvent welding to PVC pipe. All fittings must have 1/2
Drawings and Specifications. No deviation from the to 2/3 interface fit to ensure a fully seated joint. Individual
indicated make and model or installed location of valves, fittings shall be selected to ensure a proper fit, or they will
mains, laterals or any other irrigation system component be rejected.
will be allowed without first obtaining written permission
from the Ministry Representative. All pipe and fittings shall be continuously and legibly
marked with at least the following information:
The Contractor shall maintain a daily record of construction
activities. Upon completion of the Contract, the Contractor • Manufacturer's name or trademark;
shall incorporate all accumulated information relevant to the • Pressure rating;
Contract into the required as-built drawings. The as-built
drawings shall be to the Ministry Representative's • Type of material.
satisfaction, shall be reproducible, and shall be compiled by Pipe that is not marked to the satisfaction of the Ministry
a competent professional draftsperson. Representative will be rejected and shall be removed from
The Contractor shall prepare drawings showing the final the Site by the Contractor.
location and make of all heads, emitter locations, pipe Table 766-A: Minimum Classes of Plastic Pipe
layout and other pertinent information, and shall submit two
sets of these drawings to the Ministry Representative. The Class 200 for excavated
Contractor shall prepare another Drawing showing the Up to 25 mm diameter
trenches
wiring and automatic controller station numbers with all
electrical data. The Contractor shall submit two copies of 30 mm diameter and Class 160 for excavated
this Drawing and one set of the operating instructions for larger trenches
the controller, complete with spare parts list to the Ministry All sizes Class 200 for pipe flow
Representative. All drawings, spare parts lists, and

BC MoTI SS 2020 766 (1 of 5)


Vol. 2 Page 376 of 452
SECTION 766 IRRIGATION

766.13 Cement – Pipe cement for solvent welding shall be damaged, the damaged materials shall be removed and new
of the type and make recommended by the pipe parts or sections shall be installed .
manufacturer, supplied to the Site in sealed containers
766.32 Line Location – The Contractor shall ensure that all
clearly marked with the name of the manufacturer and the
irrigation pre-ducts for passage of irrigation lines under
lot number. The Contractor shall comply with the
roadways, medians, traffic islands and other surface
manufacturer's instructions and safety procedures.
impediments have been installed and are clearly marked at
766.14 Sprinkler Heads – Risers for turf heads, lawn all entry points.
heads, impact heads, shrub heads and quick-coupling (QC)
No irrigation line shall be installed parallel to and directly
valves shall be swing joint type, fabricated from
over another irrigation line or line of another trade. Lines
Schedule 80 PVC or Schedule 40 galvanised pipe and
laid in the same trench shall be a minimum of 50 mm apart.
fittings, as detailed in the Specifications. Teflon tape shall
No pipe shall be installed closer than 300 mm to any parallel
be used on all threaded connections.
electric conduit as shown on SS Drawing SP635-1.5.2.
Sprinkler heads shall be as detailed on the Drawings.
766.33 Compaction – Before laying the pipe, the
766.15 Valves – Automatic valves shall be as detailed on Contractor shall be satisfied as to the extent of compaction
the Drawings and the same make shall be used throughout. in the lawn and planting areas.
Automatic valves shall have flow control stems.
766.34 Excavation – Excavated soil shall be carefully
Valves shall be installed in Carson Industries No. 1419 placed adjacent to the trench for convenient backfilling.
valve boxes or other approved alternative complete with Topsoil and subsoil shall be piled separately to avoid
extensions and covers, as required. The top of all valve box contamination of the topsoil.
covers shall be flush with the finished grade.
Stones or other objects larger than 75 mm at their widest
766.16 Controllers – Automatic controllers shall be point shall be removed from the trenches. Holes below
supplied to operate the electrically controlled automatic grade lines, caused by the removal of stones, must be filled
valves. Controllers shall be 24-volt A.C. outlet, Class 2 in and compacted uniformly with the adjacent trench.
rating, compatible with the valves used. Controllers and
766.35 Laying the Pipe – Pipe shall be laid by trench
automatic valves shall be by the same manufacturer, unless
excavation or by an approved vibrating pipe plough. Plastic
otherwise noted. Controllers and transformers must bear
pipe shall be laid on sand or selected native fill to a
CSA or Provincial stamps of approval. Controllers shall be
compacted depth of 50 mm. A further 75 mm of sand or
as detailed on the Drawings.
selected native fill shall be placed over plastic pipes prior to
Controllers shall be installed in Ministry standard controller backfilling. Pipes shall be run in straight lines between
box 30-A-120/240V, weatherproof, stainless steel service fittings. Pipe must not be supported at intermediate points
panel SN1765A as shown on SS Drawing SP635-2.4.8, or on stones, bricks or other hard material.
pre-approved equal complete with a Masterlock No. 15
All mains and laterals shall have a minimum cover of
padlock and two sets of keys for the lock.
400 mm of soil as measured from the top of the pipe to the
766.17 Wiring – Wire between controllers and automatic finished grade.
valves shall be of a type approved for direct burial. Where
Lawn and planting areas shall be disturbed as little as
control wires are exposed or pass through culverts, they
possible.
shall be installed in rigid electrical conduit.
The Contractor shall manicure the finished grade over all
Wire shall be minimum 14-gauge single strand T.W.U.
mains and laterals upon completion of the pipe installation.
766.18 Selected Native Fill – Native fill selected for All debris, rocks over 50 mm diameter, etc., that have been
backfilling shall be free draining, fine grained sand and/or brought to the grade surface shall be removed to the
gravel, containing no material larger than 19 mm in Contractor's disposal location. The area over all trenches
diameter, wood, or other debris; or may other approved fill shall be fine graded and shall conform to SS 751.34.
material. All backfill shall be subject to the approval of the
766.36 Connections – The Contractor shall make
Ministry Representative.
connection to the existing water supply where shown on the
Drawings. The Contractor shall ensure that the
recommended operating pressure of the irrigation system is
CONSTRUCTION
not exceeded by the water pressure at the source, by
766.31 General – Damaged Material – Damaged material installing pressure regulators as required.
shall be rejected on the decision of the Ministry
766.37 Inspection and Testing – After the pipe is in place
Representative.
in the bottom of the trench with risers in place, the risers
Plastic pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances shall not be shall be capped where the sprinklers will be attached, and
repaired by patching or taping. Where materials have been all pipe fittings exposed. The maximum pressure shall be

BC MoTI SS 2020 766 (2 of 5)


Vol. 2 Page 377 of 452
SECTION 766 IRRIGATION

applied to the system and maintained for a minimum of one These call-backs shall be done within five days of
hour. notification by the Ministry Representative and shall be
considered part of the Contract requirements.
All fittings shall be visually inspected and any that leak shall
be cut out and replaced. Leaks shall not be repaired by 766.41 Surplus Material – Surplus materials shall be
patching or taping. The test pressure shall be maintained for removed from the Site.
one hour after replacing any defective sections. The section
766.42 Conditions for Acceptance – Completion will not
shall be re-inspected as before.
be certified until adjustments are completed and as-built
The system shall be flushed out to remove dirt and then the drawings prepared, approved, and bound into an approved
sprinklers shall be attached using Teflon tape or booklet to the Ministry Representative's satisfaction. A
pre-approved non-setting pipe thread compound. copy of the inspection certificate issued by the Ministry of
Competition, Science and Enterprise indicating compliance
766.38 Backfill – After approval by the Ministry
with the Electrical Code and a copy of the "Irrigation
Representative, the trenches shall be backfilled, maintaining
Systems Loss Calculation Sheet" found in the Ministry of
pressure in the line. If there is any indication of a leak, the
Transportation Landscape Policy – Appendix 3 shall be
defective section shall be located and replaced.
included in the hardcover booklet.
The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the subsoil,
766.43 Monitoring and Winterization – The Contractor
followed by the topsoil. Both shall be compacted to the
shall monitor the operation of the system and carry out all
same density as the soil in the trench walls to minimize
minor repairs and required adjustments to the spray
differential settlement. Backfill around turf heads with
coverage of irrigation heads and operating times.
0.03 m³ of sand.
The irrigation system shall be properly winterized at the
766.39 Controller Installation – The location of the
appropriate time of the season.
controllers shall be determined on Site in the areas indicated
on the Drawings. The Contractor shall have a qualified
electrician connect the controllers to the electrical supply.
PAYMENT
766.40 Adjustments – The sprinkler system shall be
766.91 General – Payment for the supply and installation
adjusted section by section to give satisfactory coverage to
of the irrigation system will be at the lump sum bid. The
all areas. Pressure at the heads and/or Q.C. valves shall be
lump sum price bid shall be full compensation for all labour
as noted on the Drawings. Turf heads, lawn heads and Q.C.
and equipment required for the specified preparation,
valves shall be set flush with the final turf grade by adjusting
trenching, installation, connection, testing, backfilling,
the swing joint riser, as required. During the landscape
clean-up, preparation of as-built drawings, and instruction
maintenance/guarantee period, the Contractor will return
in the proper use of the equipment and for all incidental
twice and adjust the heads, as required, to be flush with the
final turf grade. work not required to be separately paid for .

BC MoTI SS 2020 766 (3 of 5)


Vol. 2 Page 378 of 452
SECTION 766 IRRIGATION

BC MoTI SS 2020 766 (3 of 5)


Vol. 2 Page 379 of 452
SECTION 766 IRRIGATION

BC MoTI SS 2020 766 (4 of 5)


Vol. 2 Page 380 of 452
SECTION 769

PROTECTION AND RETENTION OF VEGETATION

DESCRIPTION Areas shown on the Drawings adjacent to streams or as


designated by the Ministry Representative as "Vegetation to
769.01 Scope – This Section refers to the protective
Remain" areas are not to be disturbed, cleared or logged.
measures required to safeguard vegetation from
construction operations, equipment and vehicles, where The Contractor's operations shall not cause flooding,
vegetation is not designated for removal under the Contract, sediment deposits or deposition of debris in "Vegetation to
and covers the installation of barriers. Remain" areas.
769.02 Related Work – Where construction procedures substantially alter natural
drainage patterns, interim drainage or irrigation shall be
• SS 165, Protection of the Environment; provided as necessary to compensate for construction
• SS 200, Clearing and Grubbing; interference.

• SS 201, Roadway and Drainage Excavation; Construction procedures, stockpiling of materials or debris
burning or disposal shall not be undertaken adjacent to
• SS 751, Topsoil and Landscape Grading. Specimen Trees and/or Native Vegetation retained.
769.03 Definitions Unless the Contract requires work within the dripline of
• Barrier – means fence consisting of approved material, Specimen Trees, equipment shall not be operated within that
supported by steel posts and being a minimum of 2.0 m dripline. When the Contract requires work within the
high, without breaks or unsupported sections. dripline of Specimen Trees, operation of equipment within
that dripline area shall be kept to the minimum necessary to
• Dripline – means the location on the ground surface perform the work required, as required by the Ministry
directly beneath a theoretical line described by the tips Representative. Tree roots shall be protected from
of the outermost branches of trees. compaction by temporary placement of hog fuel or other
lightweight insulation material, as required by the Ministry
• Native Vegetation – means areas of existing and/or Representative.
indigenous shrubs, trees and groundcover.
Equipment or vehicles shall not be parked, repaired or
• Specimen Trees – means trees so designated in the refuelled, construction materials shall not be stored and
Contract Documents. earth materials shall not be stockpiled within the dripline
area of any Specimen Trees.
MATERIALS If Giant, Bohemian, Japanese or Himalayan Knotweed
species are found within the project footprint, they shall not
769.11 Water – Water shall be free of impurities that would be disturbed or removed without an invasive species
inhibit germination and growth or may be harmful to the management plan and pre-approval by the Ministry
environment. Representative. Vehicles, equipment, or materials shall not
The Contractor shall supply the water. be parked or stored in areas where knotweed species are
present.
769.12 Fertilizer – Fertilizer shall be supplied to the
specifications of the Special Provisions and to SS 751.18. 769.32 Clearing and Grubbing – No clearing and
grubbing shall be conducted for a radius of 3 m from the
trunks which lie on the edge of clearing and grubbing zones,
CONSTRUCTION or as directed by the Ministry Representative.

769.31 Operational Constraints – The Contractor's Trees to be removed shall be felled toward the centre of an
operations shall not damage vegetation designated for area, away from selectively cleared or retained vegetation.
retention. Where Drawings or Special Provisions call for areas of
Existing Native Vegetation shown on the Drawings or “Close Cut No Grubbing”, existing trees within the removal
designated by the Ministry Representative to be retained zones shall be carefully and cleanly cut as close to the
shall be marked by the Contractor and inspected by the ground as possible, with the understory vegetation retained,
Ministry Representative, who may adjust the limits. A and the root zone protected from excessive disturbance.
minimum of 48 hours notice shall be given to the Ministry 769.33 Barriers for Existing Vegetation Protection –
Representative for this purpose. Barriers for existing vegetation protection shall be erected
prior to commencement of construction operations, at

BC MoTI SS 2020 769 (1 of 2)


Vol. 2 Page 381 of 452
SECTION 769 PROTECTION AND RETENTION OF VEGETATION

locations specified in the Drawings, to provide a continuous Bark that is damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be
barricade between vegetation and the area of work. The neatly trimmed back to uninjured bark, without causing
barriers shall be maintained erect and in good repair further injury, within five calendar days of damage.
throughout the duration of construction operations, and
shall be removed upon completion of the work, and
disposed of off site of the project by the Contractor. MAINTENANCE
The barrier shall be placed at the dripline of trees or forest 769.71 Watering – The retained Specimen Trees and
edges and Native Vegetation unless there is inadequate Native Vegetation shall be watered a minimum of three
space to provide a 1.5 m buffer zone between the barrier and times during the summer or as stated in the Special
the limit of grading. The barrier shall be placed within the Provisions or as directed by the Ministry Representative.
dripline if necessary to provide a buffer zone of up to 1.5 m. The area immediately below the tree crown shall be soaked
Under no circumstance shall it be placed less than 0.75 m sufficiently to reach the feeder roots.
from the circumference of the trunk. When the trunks of
trees are less than 4.5 m apart, the trees shall be considered 769.72 Fertilizing – Where specified or directed by the
a group, and the barrier shall be placed to form a continuous Ministry Representative, fertilizer shall be applied at a rate
of 50 g/mm of caliper to existing Specimen Trees to be
barricade as specified in the Drawings.
retained. The caliper measurement shall be taken 0.3 m
A barrier is not required where an existing fence will serve above the grade. The fertilizer shall be applied once early
the same purpose. At such locations, the barrier shall in the growing season unless specified otherwise.
terminate at the existing fence so that a continuous barricade
is provided between the trees and the area of work.
769.34 Pruning and Repair of Specimen Trees – MEASUREMENT
Specimen trees and trees safeguarded by barriers shall be 769.81 General – Measurement for barriers will be made in
repaired in accordance with this Subsection. metres according to the length of barrier installed to protect
vegetation.
One third of the tree branches shall be selectively removed
to reduce transpiration and compensate for dieback of roots
in fill conditions and damage to the root system in cut
conditions. PAYMENT

Within five calendar days of damage, branches 25 mm or 769.91 General – Payment at the Unit Price bid for barriers
greater in diameter that are broken as a result of the shall be full compensation for work described and all work
Contractor's operations shall be cut back cleanly at the subsidiary and incidental thereto for which separate
break, or to within 10 mm of their base, if a substantial payment is not elsewhere provided.
portion of the branch is damaged. Cuts shall be Compensation for all costs other than installation of barriers
perpendicular to the growth of the branch to avoid leaving associated with the work of protecting and maintaining
sharp points. Native Vegetation and Specimen Trees shall be deemed to
Roots 25 mm or larger in diameter that are exposed by the be included in the Contract prices for the various Items of
Contractor's operations, shall be cut back cleanly to the soil the contract.
surface within five calendar days of exposure.

BC MoTI SS 2020 769 (2 of 2)


Vol. 2 Page 382 of 452
SECTION 904

TIMBER (TREATED AND UNTREATED)

904.01 Grading and Species - Unless specifically stated All material rejected (after maximum allowances are
otherwise elsewhere in the Contract, all timber shall be reached per applicable standards grading rules) shall be
graded in accordance with the current Standard Grading replaced at the Contractor's expense including shipping
Rules for Canadian Lumber of the National Lumber Grades charges and removal of rejected material at the Site.
Authority. Each piece of timber should be marked with a
Inspection of timber before shipment shall not prevent its
grade stamp from a lumber grading agency accredited by
subsequent rejection at the construction site if found to fail
the Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Bureau
any requirements of this specification.
(CLSAB). Timber supplied without a grade stamp, or
where the grade stamp is obscured, shall have a certificate The Contractor shall provide seven (7) days notice to the
from a lumber grading agency accredited by the CLSAB Ministry Representative regarding intent to ship a unit or
that verifies the grade and species. Copies of the grading product and the unit or product shall be made available for
certificate shall be kept by the Contractor and provided to inspection prior to loading and shipping.
the Ministry Representative upon request.
No material shall be shipped prior to inspection or until a
Timber species, grade and preservative treatment shall be as release for shipment has been issued by the Ministry
specified in the Contract Documents. Representative.
Coastal Douglas Fir [Pseudotsuga menziesii var. menziesii]
shall be used when Douglas Fir products are specified to 904.04 Handling of Untreated Timber - All materials
receive preservative treatment. shall be handled with reasonable care. Timber shall not be
bashed, bruised, gouged, cracked, split or otherwise
904.02 Framing – All the cutting, boring, framing, match damaged. Minor damage, in the opinion of the Ministry
marking, etc. required on all timber shall be done by Representative, shall be repaired at the Contractor's
competent framers in a thorough manner, in accordance expense; severely damaged materials will be rejected and
with good work practice. It shall be done such that surfaces replaced entirely at the Contractor's expense including all
in contact shall bear evenly and fully; no shims or open shipping and disposal charges.
joints are permitted. All measurements shall be accurate.
Gains and daps shall have plane, smooth surfaces.
904.06 Treated Timber – Treated timber shall be treated
904.03 – Ministry Quality Assurance and Inspection – and handled in accordance with SS 908, Preservative
The Ministry will carry out Quality Assurance and also may Treatment - Wood Products. After treatment, timber with
elect to arrange for its own inspection, before or after checks exceeding the limiting sizes in the NLGA Standard
shipment to the Site. The Ministry inspection shall not Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber for the grade specified
relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide lumber on the purchase order, Work Order, Special Provisions or
with grade stamps or certificates of compliance. Drawings shall be rejected.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary facilities to
enable the Ministry Representative to expeditiously
examine as many pieces as are deemed necessary.

o 2020 904 1 of 1
Vol. 2 Page 383 of 452
SECTION 905

TIMBER – GLUED LAMINATED

905.01 General – The requirements of the current CSA provide the 48 hours notice from the time that the Ministry
O122 - Structural Glued-Laminated Timber shall apply to is notified of this change. If the product is not available or
all glued laminated members. Wood species shall be as is not sufficiently complete for inspection as notified, at the
specified, except that if the members are specified to be sole discretion of the Ministry Representative, the
Douglas Fir - Larch, and to be pressure treated, they may Contractor shall be charged stand-by costs for the
only be of Coast Region Douglas Fir. Ministry’s quality assurance inspectors.
Cutting, framing and boring of glulam members to receive The Contractor shall provide the necessary facilities to
preservative treatment shall be done before treatment enable the Ministry Representative to expeditiously
insofar as possible. examine as many pieces as are deemed necessary. All
material rejected shall be replaced. Inspection by the
905.02 Prefabrication Meeting – The Ministry will at its
Ministry of glued laminated timber before shipment shall
discretion, convene a prefabrication meeting with the
not prevent its subsequent rejection at the construction site
Contractor to confirm the Ministry’s requirements and to
if found to fail any requirements of the Contract.
review issues such as, but not limited to, schedule, lines of
communication, fabricator and sub-fabricator scope of No material shall be shipped from the glue laminating plant
work, location of all work, procedures on quality control, prior to inspection or before a release for shipment has been
procedures for testing, lumber grading, preservative issued by the Ministry Representative.
treatment and any other specific requirements as it relates to
905.06 Incising – All surfaces of members shall be incised
the Work.
prior to pressure treatment.
905.03 Classification – Unless otherwise specified, the
905.07 Preservative Treated Glued Laminated Members
appearance grade shall be “Industrial” and the service grade
– Preservative treatment and handling of preservative
shall be “Exterior”. The stress grade shall be as shown on
treated wood shall be in accordance with CSA O122 and
the Drawings, Contract, purchase order or work order.
SS 908.
905.04 Quality Control – The Contractor shall implement
Members shall be protected to avoid damage due to
a quality control program to meet the Contract
handling: dogs, hooks, peavies or other equipment shall not
requirements. The quality control plan shall be made
be used on the side surfaces of treated timber. All handling
available to the Ministry Representative for review.
of treated timber with pointed tools shall be confined to end
Laminations shall be grade-marked and the marking shall grain and done in a manner to avoid damage to the original
be visible until the glue has been applied. pressure-treated surface.
The shear tests described in Appendices "A" and "B" of The Contractor shall field treat any damage of treated timber
CSA O122 shall be carried out by the Contractor. by the methods outlined in the current edition of CSA O80
Vacuum-pressure cycle tests described in CSA O122 shall Wood Preservation or the AWPA Standards. For bridge
be carried out by the Contractor. components, creosote and copper naphthenate shall be the
only permitted field treatment preservatives. At the
The Contractor shall provide test results from the shear and
discretion of the Ministry Representative, timber which
vacuum-pressure tests to the Ministry Representative.
cannot be repaired by such methods will be rejected.
905.05 Quality Assurance – The Ministry will implement
905.08 Storage of Glued Laminated Members –
a quality assurance program by auditing the Contractor's
Members lying in storage shall be supported evenly on a flat
quality control program and by inspection and testing at its
surface. When stored for a prolonged time, they shall be
discretion.
gapped to permit air circulation and covered to prevent UV
The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative at damage.
least 14 days before fabrication has commenced. The
905.09 Working Drawings – Working drawings shall
Contractor shall allow the Ministry Representative access to
consist of the following:
all parts of the Work, and shall supply such information and
assistance as is required. All timber and all phases of the • Shop drawings,
work including pressure treatment, if applicable, may be
• Transportation details, and
inspected by the Ministry Representative.
• Erection drawings
The Ministry Representative shall be given 48 hours notice
of commencement of gluing and pressure treating. If the Transportation details and erection drawings shall be
schedule is subsequently changed, the Contractor shall prepared and sealed by a professional engineer registered

BC MoTI SS 2020 905 (1 of 4)


Vol. 2 Page 384 of 452
SECTION 905 TIMBER – GLUED LAMINATED

with the Association of Professional Engineers and layout of the members, equipment positioning, and
Geoscientists of the Province of British Columbia access roads
(APEGBC).
• Crane make, model, and capacity charts, boom
When the Contractor is responsible for the design of items length(s), crane placement, and access for transporting
that are detailed on the shop drawings, the shop drawings of members to crane(s)
shall be prepared and sealed by a professional engineer
• Radii and loads for crane lifts
registered with the Association of Professional Engineers
and Geoscientists of the Province of British Columbia • Rigging details
(APEGBC).
• Mass of members, rigging and special installation
Working drawings shall be in the same system of units as equipment
the design drawings.
• Details for installation and removal of all falsework,
Lettering for notes and dimensions shall be at least 2.5 mm temporary supports, temporary bearings, bracing, guys,
and 4 mm for headings. Drawings shall be legible when dead-men, and lifting devices
printed on 11” x 17” sheets.
• Attachments to the bridge members and bridge
905.10.01 Shop Drawings – Shop drawings shall show all structure for temporary support and special launching
information and details needed for the fabrication of the equipment
members including, but not limited to, such items as
• Detailed description of sequence of operations
member shapes and dimensions, camber diagram, complete
geometric information that member dimensions and shapes • Details for special installation equipment such as a
are based on, connection details, material and product launching truss, launching nose, head frames, spreader
standards, mark numbers and general arrangement of beams and rollers
member locations, details of attachments, fastener details,
mass of members, special tolerances, special handling • Details for installation of members onto the permanent
instructions, lifting details and lifting locations. bearings

A copy of the shop drawings shall be available at all times • Traffic control plan for roadway and rail traffic
at the location where the components shown on the • Details for protection of existing utilities affected by
drawings are being fabricated. Changes to the glue the erection procedures
laminated timber from what is shown on the reviewed shop
drawings, or repairs made during fabrication and/or • Layout and details of fall protection and their sequence
construction, shall be indicated by the Contractor on a of installation.
marked-up set of shop drawings in digital format and The Contractor shall be responsible for the lateral stability
submitted to the Ministry Representative at the completion of members and shall design and provide bracing as
of the Work. necessary until completion of the Work.
905.10.02 Transportation Details – Transportation details The erection drawings shall be complete in detail for all
shall include such items as: anticipated phases and conditions during erection and
• Description of hauling and handling equipment during the temporary support of members. The Contractor
shall submit calculations, upon request, to the Ministry
• Weight of members Representative that demonstrate that specified factored
• Length and height of loads demand/capacity ratios or allowable stresses are not
exceeded in members, falsework, temporary bracing and
• Location and method of member support temporary supports and that member capacities and final
geometry will be correct. These calculations shall be sealed
• Details for handling, storing, and loading of members.
by the professional engineer who sealed the erection
905.10.03 Erection Drawings – Erection drawings shall drawings.
show in detail the method of erection including, but not
limited to, the following: Falsework, temporary supports and temporary bracing shall
meet the requirements of CSA S269.1, “Falsework and
• Erection procedures Formwork” and shall also meet all the requirements for
falsework given in Clauses 20.17 to 20.26 inclusive of the
• Procedures for off loading of members upon delivery
WCB Occupational Health and Safety Regulation.
• Details for temporary storage and support of members
A professional engineer registered with APEGBC shall be
on site prior to erection
responsible for any field designs and any changes made to
• Equipment to be used the erection procedures. Field designs and changes to the
erection procedures must be documented and sealed by the
• Layout or general arrangement drawing showing the

BC MoTI SS 2020 905 (2 of 4)


Vol. 2 Page 385 of 452
SECTION 905 TIMBER – GLUED LAMINATED

responsible professional engineer and must be available at Review of working drawings shall not relieve the
the Site prior to the affected erection Work being carried Contractor of responsibility for carrying out the work in
out. accordance with the contract documents.
Immediately before placement of loading on falsework, the If so agreed to in advance by the Ministry Representative,
Contractor must ensure that the falsework is inspected and working drawings may be submitted in paper format. The
a sealed engineering certificate is issued by a professional reference to shop drawing submittal copies shall be
engineer registered with APEGBC which: increased to four paper copies in this case.
• Indicates the specific areas inspected and At least 14 days before fabrication is to commence, or as
otherwise requested by the Ministry Representative, the
• Certifies that the falsework has been erected in
fabricator shall submit a schedule of fabrication to the
accordance with the latest approved erection drawings
Ministry Representative in the form of a Gantt Chart. At the
and supplementary instructions.
discretion of the Ministry, the schedule shall be updated on
905.10.04 Submittals – The Contractor shall submit to the no less than a monthly basis. The schedule shall be made
Ministry Representative one set of all working drawings in available to the Ministry Representative for reference and
digital format. Prior to submission to the Ministry planning of inspections and progress reporting. At the
Representative, working drawings shall be reviewed and request of the Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall
approved by the Contractor. By this review and approval, report any interim variations to the schedule.
the Contractor represents that it has determined and verified
905.10.05 Working Drawing Format – The Contractor
all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials,
shall transmit working drawings through attachments to e-
and similar data, and that it has checked and coordinated
mail. Unless otherwise agreed to by the Ministry
each working drawing with the requirements of the work
Representative, electronic attachments to an email must
and the contract documents. The Contractor shall indicate
total no more than 7 MB and must be submitted unzipped.
its review and approval by including on each drawing the
(Note: BC Government servers reject, without notice, all
date and signature of a person designated by the Contractor
e-mails with “zipped” attachments.) Drawing files shall be
as being responsible for the Work.
submitted in PDF format to print out on 11” x 17” size
Working drawings shall be submitted at least fourteen days pages. PDF sets shall be created by “distilling” CAD sheets
prior to the fabrication of the Work and shall be rather than by scanning paper plan sets. Unless otherwise
accompanied by a transmittal listing each of the drawings agreed to by the Ministry Representative, electronic
submitted. At the time of submission, the Contractor must attachments greater than 7 MB in size shall be sent in two
notify the Ministry Representative in writing of any parts by separate emails, denoting “1 of 2” and “2 of 2” in
deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the subject lines after other required subject-line
the contract documents. Any Work done or materials information.
ordered prior to the review of the working drawings shall be
If agreed to by the Ministry Representative, the Contractor
at the Contractor's risk. The Ministry will review the
may employ a document and data management service such
drawings for general compliance with the contract
as SharePoint® to transmit working drawings. If this
requirements.
process is used, the limitation on drawing file size is waived.
If modifications to the drawings are required, the Ministry The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up the
Representative will return one set of drawings, marked up, appropriate folders within the document and data
to the Contractor. The Contractor shall re-submit one management software and for providing access to these
complete set of the revised drawings in digital format to the folders to the fabricator, Ministry Representative and the
Ministry Representative. Any drawing that has changed design engineer. The Contractor and the Ministry
from the version originally submitted shall be identified as Representative shall send e-mail notification to each other
such on a transmittal accompanying the revised drawing set. whenever they post drawings to the document and data
management folders.
If no exceptions are taken to the drawings, the Ministry
Representative will return one set of reviewed drawings to The resolution of drawings shall be such that the finest
the Contractor. detail must be legible at full scale on a monitor without
zooming in (1-in. width on an 11”x17” sheet is 1 in. on the
Shop drawings will not be reviewed without the
monitor).
transportation details and erection drawings applicable to
the members in question. Drawings shall be black images on a white background.
Erection will not be allowed to proceed without the Ministry All PDF sheets shall be assembled within a single file
Representative’s review of the method proposed. ensuring that all sheets are rotated to a “ready to read”
orientation within the PDF file set. Generally, 11” x17”
plan sheets should be in landscape and 8½” x 11” note
sheets in portrait, so that the majority of text is vertical. PDF

BC MoTI SS 2020 905 (3 of 4)


Vol. 2 Page 386 of 452
SECTION 905 TIMBER – GLUED LAMINATED

sheets shall be ready to print out on appropriately sized 905.11 Payment


paper sheets with no additional formatting required by the
905.11.01 Supply and Fabrication – Payment for supply
viewer.
and fabrication of glued laminated timber will be made at
Drawing sets that are not legible or that do not conform to the lump sum price bid. Payment shall be for quality
submission requirements will be returned to the Contractor control, working drawings, the supply and fabrication of all
without being reviewed and the Contractor shall submit four necessary work. Payment shall also cover storage as
paper copies of the drawing set as substitutes. Drawings of necessary.
large or complicated pieces, where it is not practical to show
905.11.02 Shipping and Erection – Payment for shipping
all details on an 11” x 17” sheet, may be submitted on full
and erection of glued laminated timber will be made at the
size paper drawings, in which case the Contractor shall
lump sum price bid. Payment shall be for quality control
submit four copies of the drawing set. When revisions to
and the loading, shipping and unloading of glued laminated
full size paper drawings are required, the Contractor shall
timber. Payment shall also cover falsework if necessary and
supply four complete sets to the Ministry Representative.
the erection of glued laminated timber.

BC MoTI SS 2020 905 (4 of 4)


Vol. 2 Page 387 of 452
SECTION 906

ROUND TIMBER PILES

906.01 Scope – This Section covers the quality and Diameters in Table 906-A are minimum, except for the
manufacture of untreated and pressure-treated round timber tolerance permitted in SS 906.03.01(f).
piles.
906.03.01 Diameter
Note: Round timber piles may be used in the completed
(a) All measurements of diameter shall be made inside the
Work only when explicitly identified in the Contract as an
bark.
acceptable product.
(b) The diameter of treated piles shall be measured after
Where convenient, the requirements contained in this Section
treatment.
use the wording of the current CSA O56 Round Wood Piles,
in particular for term definition (see Appendix 906-A) and the (c) Butt diameters shall be measured at the extreme butt.
majority of measurement and material requirements. Maximum diameter at the butt shall not exceed 500 mm
for any pile size.
Preservative treatment of piles shall conform to the
requirements of SS 908. (d) Tip diameters shall be measured at the extreme tip.
906.02 Species (e) The diameter of a pile at a given point along its length
shall be determined either by measuring the
906.02.01 Untreated Piles – This specification does not
circumference at that point and dividing the result by 3.14
restrict the species used for untreated piles except as may be
or by taking the average of the maximum and minimum
specified in the Contract Documents.
diameters measured at the point in question.
906.02.02 Pressure Treated Piles – Species of piles to be
(f) A variation of -13 mm in the diameter at the tip or at the
pressure treated shall be as specified and restricted to those
butt but not in both, shall be allowed in not more than
for which pressure treating specifications are included in CSA
25% of the piles within a given substructure element
O80 Wood Preservation.
provided there are at least four piles in that element.
906.03 Size – The size of a pile shall be designated by length,
(g) If allowances are specified, they shall supersede
minimum and maximum butt diameter and minimum tip
SS 906.03.01(f).
diameter. Sizes of piles normally available are shown in
Table 906-A. 906.03.02 Length
Table 906-A: Sizes of Timber Piles (a) Pile lengths shall be measured in metres.
Size Designation (b) A variation of 15 m from designated lengths will be
Minimum Diameter at permitted, unless allowable over and under lengths are
Extreme Butt or Large End specified.
Length in (mm) 906.04 General Material Requirements – Piles shall be cut
Metres from sound live trees. Sides and end surfaces of the piles shall
360 330 300 280 250 230
be free of ice, snow and mud, and exposed for visual
Minimum Diameter inspection.
at Small End Tip (mm)
906.04.01 Untreated Piles – Untreated piles shall be sound
Up to 6.1 250 250 230 200 180 150 and close-grained.

6.1 to 10.4 250 230 200 180 150 150 906.04.02 Treated Piles – Treated piles shall meet the
following:
10.7 to 13.4 230 200 180 150 - - (a) have not less than 20 mm sapwood, and shall be cleanly
peeled;
13.7 to 18.0 200 180 180 - - -
(b) in any 300 mm length of the pile, the maximum
18.3 to 21.0 200 180 150 - - - combined total depth of all trimmed scars shall not
exceed 25 mm;
21.3 to 27.1 180 150 - - - -
(c) not be cored until 24 hours after treatment; and
27.4 to 32.0 150 130 - - - - (d) be cored in the middle third of the length of the pile.

BC MoTI SS 2020 906 (1 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 388 of 452
SECTION 906 ROUND TIMBER PILES

906.05 Defects the sum of all knot diameters does not exceed 1/3 of
the diameter of the pile at the section where they
906.05.01 Prohibited Defects
occur;
(a) Through checks
(ii) For piles more than 15 m in length, knots between:
(b) Bird holes
(A) mid-length and butt shall conform to the
(c) Cross-breaks of grain (cracks) requirements for piles of 15 m or less;
(d) Decay (B) mid-length and the tip, up to 125 mm in
diameter, will be permitted provided that the
(e) Nails, spikes and other metal or foreign substance sum of all knots does not exceed 1/2 of the
(f) Holes in treated piles (except holes for test purposes, diameter of the pile at the cross-section where
which shall be properly plugged). Holes for brailing they occur.
purposes shall be drilled prior to treatment
(c) Shakes in the butt end of a pile are permitted provided
(g) Shakes in the tip that the length of any single shake, or the total length of
any number of shakes, measured along the line of the
(h) Splits in the tip shake, does not exceed 1/3 of the measured diameter of
(i) Insect damage the butt.
(j) Any abnormal change in cross-section (including ground (d) Splits in the butt end of a pile are permitted provided that
swell) they are not longer than the diameter of the butt.
(k) Knot clusters (e) Sweep is permitted provided that it cannot be classified
as short crook or reverse sweep and provided that:
(l) Unsound scars (cat faces)
(i) For piles less than 21 m in length, a straight line
(m) Short crooks (see SS Drawing SP906-01) joining the mid-point of the butt and the mid-point
(n) Reverse sweep (see SS Drawing SP906-02) of the tip does not at any intermediate point pass
outside the surface of the pile;
(o) Burst - unsound piling which have 15 mm or more of a
concentration of oil in the deadwood (ii) for piles 21 m and up to 24 m in length, a similar
straight line does not lie more than 25 mm outside
906.05.02 Permitted Defects the surface of the pile; or
(a) Firm red heart (iii) for piles over 24 m in length, a similar line does not
(b) Hard stain lie more than 50 mm outside the surface of the pile.

(c) Compression wood Note: See SS Drawing SP906-01.


906.05.03 Limited Defects (f) Holes for untreated piles less than 13 mm in average
diameter will be permitted provided that:
(a) Checks caused by treating and normal seasoning shall not
exceed the following: (i) they are scattered over the surface of the pile; and

(i) Checks in the tips of the pile from the pith to the (ii) the sum of the average diameter of all holes in any
circumference shall not be wider than 10 mm at the square 300 mm x 300 mm of pile surface does not
circumference. exceed 38 mm and the depth of any one hole does
not exceed 38 mm.
(ii) If checks are wider than 10 mm but not deeper than
1/3 of the diameter of the pile, not more than three (g) Spiral Grain shall not exceed 1/2 turn in any 6 m length
of these checks shall occur in the circumference of of pile.
the pile at that point. If checks are deeper than 1/3 906.06 Manufacturing Requirements – All piles shall be cut
of the diameter of the pile but not to the heart, and above the ground swell and have a uniform taper throughout
not wider than 10 mm, then only two such checks their whole length.
shall occur in the circumference of the pile at that
point. The sum of all the widths of checks in a pile Completely overgrown knots rising more than 30 mm above
shall not exceed 1/4 of the diameter where they the pile surface, branch stubs, and partially overgrown knots
occur. shall be trimmed close.
(b) Sound Knots will be permitted as follows: Peeling of piles by hand or machine shall be done carefully so
as not to gouge or otherwise damage the surface of the pile,
(i) For piles 15 m and less in length, knots up to and the reduction in thickness of sapwood shall be the
100 mm in diameter will be permitted provided that minimum possible.

BC MoTI SS 2020 906 (2 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 389 of 452
SECTION 906 ROUND TIMBER PILES

Sawing of butts and tips shall be cut perpendicular to the axis 906.09 Quality Control – Quality control inspection of any
of the pile. Bevelling at the ends of the piles shall not be preservative treatment shall be in accordance with SS 908.
permitted.
Treated piles being supplied from previously treated stock
906.07 Storage – Piles shall be stacked in treated or other shall have been clearly stamped with the applicable Charge
non-decaying skids of such dimensions, and so arranged as to Number or other positive identification, and the appropriate
support the piles without producing noticeable distortion of treatment records shall be made available to the Ministry
any of them. A cover should be put over them to protect Representative for inspection.
against the elements.
All piles being supplied from previously treated stock shall be
906.08 Handling – Handling of preservative treated piles subject to re-inspection which shall be in accordance with SS
shall be in accordance with SS 908. 908.
906.08.01 Additional Handling Requirements – Handling Piles to be supplied from previously treated stock which have
shall also meet the following: been stored in water shall, if ordered by the Ministry
Representative, be removed from the water if such action is
(a) All piles shall be handled with reasonable care. Piles
required to provide adequate inspection. At the Contractor’s
shall not be bruised or otherwise damaged. Minor
option, such inspection may be carried out at the Site. All
damage shall be repaired and severely damaged piles
piles rejected at the Site shall be removed and replaced.
shall be replaced. Handling damage will be unacceptable
if it reduces the depth of sapwood so as to render the pile 906.10 Quality Assurance – The Ministry will implement a
untreatable. quality assurance program by auditing the Contractor's
quality control program and by inspection and testing at its
(b) During lifting, long piles shall be supported at a sufficient
discretion.
number of properly located points to prevent damage due
to excessive bending. Piles may have quality assurance inspection before shipment
to the Site, at the Site or both. The Contractor shall provide
(c) Dogs, hooks, peavies or other equipment shall not be
the necessary facilities to enable the Ministry Representative
used on the round surface of treated piling, except in the
to expeditiously examine all parts of each pile. All piles
last one metre of the butt end.
rejected shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense,
(d) The Contractor shall make good any superficial damage including shipping charges and removal of reject piles from
of treated piles by field treatment methods in accordance the Site, if applicable. Inspection of the piles before shipment
with CSA O80 Wood Preservation. Piles, which, in the shall not prevent their subsequent rejection at the Site if found
opinion of the Ministry Representative, cannot be made to fail any requirements of this Section.
good by such methods, will be rejected.

BC MoTI SS 2020 906 (3 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 390 of 452
SECTION 906 ROUND TIMBER PILES

APPENDIX 906-A – DEFINITIONS


Check: separation of the wood along the grain, the greater Knot cluster: two or more knots grouped together as a unit
part of which occurs across the rings of annual growth. with the fibres of wood deflected around the entire unit.
Through check: a check, which extends from surface to Knot diameter: the diameter of a knot as it appears on the
surface of the pile, usually through the pith centre. surface of a pile measured in a direction at right angles to the
lengthwise axis of the pile.
Compression wood: wood which has grown abnormally as
often occurs on the lower side of branches and inclined trunks Unpeeled: no attempt is made to remove the bark from the
of coniferous trees. pile, but does not mean that all of the bark is on the pile as it
may be scuffed, knocked, or worn off after the pile is cut.
Compression wood:
Rough peeled: all of the outer bark is removed from the pile.
• is denser and harder than normal wood but may be
lower in strength for its mass. Clean peeled: all of the rough bark is removed from the pile,
and all of the inner bark from at least 80% of the surface of
• is characterized by relatively wide annual rings,
the pile, no piece of inner bark more than 200 mm long
usually eccentric.
remains on the surface of the pile, and there is at least 30 mm
• has a relatively high proportion of summerwood of clean wood surface between any two strips of inner bark.
(frequently more than 50% of the width of the annual
Red heart: a condition caused by fungus (Fomes pini,
rings in which it occurs).
Trametes pini) which occurs in the living trees of some
• exhibits little contrast in colour between springwood conifers. It is characterized in the early stages of infection by
and summerwood, and a reddish or brownish colour in the heartwood. Later the
wood in the living tree disintegrates (decays) in small, usually
• shrinks excessively lengthwise as compared with distinct areas that develop into white-lined pockets.
normal wood.
Firm red heart: the early stages of infection, characterized
Crack: separation of the wood cells across the grain (this
by a reddish or brownish colour in the heartwood, which does
may be due to internal strains resulting from unequal
not affect the strength of the pile.
longitudinal shrinkage or to external forces).
Scar (cat face): a depression in the surface of the pile
Decay (rot, dote): the disintegration of the wood substance, resulting from a wound where healing has not re-established
due to the action of wood-destroying fungi (rot and dote mean the normal cross-section of the pile.
the same as decay).
Shake: a separation along the grain, the greater part of which
Grain: the direction, size, arrangement, and appearance of
occurs between the rings of annual growth.
fibres in a pile.
Short crook: a localized deviation from straightness which,
Spiral grain: a type of growth in which the fibres take a
within any section 1.5 m or less in length, is more than 65 mm
spiral course about the bole of a tree instead of the normal
(see SS Drawing SP906-01).
vertical course. The spiral may extend right-handed or
left-handed around the tree trunk. The amount of spiral grain Sound: free from decay and insect holes.
in a pile is measured as the distance in metres, along the axis
Split: a lengthwise separation of the wood due to the tearing
of the pile in which one complete twist of the spiral occurs,
apart of the wood cells which usually extends from surface to
and is expressed as, for example, one (1) turn in 12 m.
surface of the pile.
Hole: an opening, perforation or cavity in a pile.
Stain: a discolouration on or in the wood other than its natural
Bird holes: holes and damage caused by woodpeckers and colour, caused by the action of certain moulds and fungi.
other species of birds.
Hard stain: a stain, which is not accompanied by softening
Plugged holes: holes that have been filled by forcing in or other disintegration of the wood.
another piece of wood.
Sweep: the deviation of the pile from straightness (see SS
Insect damage: result of boring in the pile by insects or insect Drawing SP906-01).
larvae. Scoring or channelling of the surface is not classified
Reverse sweep: a deviation from straightness, which changes
as insect damage.
direction or reverses direction in the length of the pile (see SS
Knot: that portion of a branch or limb that has become Drawing SP906-02).
incorporated into the body of a tree.

BC MoTI SS 2020 906 (4 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 391 of 452
SECTION 906 ROUND TIMBER PILES

BC MoTI SS 2020 906 (5 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 392 of 452
SECTION 906 ROUND TIMBER PILES

BC MoTI SS 2020 906 (6 of 6)


Vol. 2 Page 393 of 452
SECTION 908
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT – WOOD PRODUCTS

908.01 Scope – This Section covers the quality and


requirements for preservative treatment of wood products Table 908-A: Standards, Specifications, and
using pressure treatment. Publications
908.02 General – Treated wood shall meet the requirements Agency /
of SS 908 as well as the product specific requirements in the Description
Spec.
following related Standard Specification sections, as
applicable to the intended use: CSA Canadian Standards Association
O80 Wood Preservation Series of standards
• SS 213 Timber Bridges - Construction
General Requirements for Wood
• SS 214 Timber Piling Construction O80.0
Preservation
• SS 604 Steel Traffic Barrier Construction O80.1 Specification of Treated Wood
• SS 635 Electrical and Signing O80.2 Processing and Treatment
O80.3 Preservative Formulations
• SS 700 Wildlife Exclusion Fencing
AWPA American Wood Protection Association
• SS 741 Fence Construction
Standard for the Purchase of Treated Wood
M1
• SS 904 Timber (Treated and Untreated) Products
• SS 905 Timber – Glued Laminated; Standard for the Inspection of Preservative
M2
Treated Products for Industrial Use
• SS 906 Round Timber Piles Standard for the Quality Control of
• SS 909 Treated Wood Fence Posts M3 Preservative Treated Products for Industrial
Use
908.03 References – The standards, specifications and
Use Category System: Processing and
publications as listed in Table 908-A shall apply to all T1
Treatment Standard
treated wood products.
Use Category System: User Specification
When a requirement of the CSA O80 Series of Standards U1
for Treated Wood
conflicts with a requirement of an AWPA Standard, the
requirement of the CSA O80 Series of Standards shall take American Lumber Standard Committee
ALSC Treated Wood Program
precedence.
Canadian Lumber Standards
908.04 Timber Grading – All timber (excluding round CLSAB
Accreditation Board
fence posts) shall be graded in accordance with the National
Lumber Grades Authority’s current Standard Grading Rules Canadian Wood Preservation
CWPCA
for Canadian Lumber. Certification Authority
Each piece of timber (excluding fence posts) should be National Lumber Grades Authority
marked with a grade stamp from a lumber grading agency NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian
accredited by the Canadian Lumber Standards Lumber
Accreditation Bureau (CLSAB). Western Wood Preservers Institute
Best Management Practices for Use of
Timber supplied without a grade stamp, or where the grade WWPI
Wood in Aquatic and Other Sensitive
stamp is obscured, shall have a certificate from a lumber Environments
grading agency accredited by the CLSAB that verifies the
grade and species. Copies of the grading certificate shall be
kept by the Contractor and provided to the Ministry 908.06 Conditioning – All timber shall be air seasoned
Representative upon request. sufficiently and properly conditioned in accordance with
CSA O80 prior to treatment to ensure proper penetration of
908.05 Species and Grade – Timber species and Grade preservative during the treatment process and to prevent
shall be as specified in the related Standard Specification checking after treatment.
sections and Contract Documents.
In exceptional circumstances, the Ministry Representative
“Coastal” Douglas Fir [Pseudotsuga menziesii var. may permit conditioning by steaming as per CSA O80.2,
menziesii] shall be used when Douglas Fir products are clause 4.4.4 and/or the latest AWPA T1 Standard.
specified to receive preservative treatment.

o 2020 908 1 of 4
Vol. 2 Page 394 of 452
SECTION 908 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT – WOOD PRODUCTS

908.07 Preservative Treatment – All treated wood 908.07.03 Environmental Compliance – Preservatives
materials shall be pressure treated in accordance with shall comply with all required environmental regulations.
CSA O80. Treated wood for use in bridges or for use near or in aquatic
environments shall be treated in accordance with the most
The preservative treatment of laminated veneer lumber shall
recent version of Best Management Practices for Use of
be in accordance with AWPA U1 and parallel strand Wood in Aquatic and Other Sensitive Environments,
lumber shall be in accordance with AWPA U1 and published by Western Wood Preservers Institute et al
AWPA T1. (WWPI BMPs).
908.07.01 Acceptable Preservatives – One of the 908.07.04 Other Conditions – The type of preservative,
following preservatives shall be used: conditioning, treatment, penetration and retention for the
(a) creosote; treated wood product shall be appropriate for the species,
size, and end use of the product.
(b) pentachlorophenol in Type A hydrocarbon solvent;
All sawn wood and glued-laminated members shall be
(c) copper naphthenate in Type A hydrocarbon solvent; incised before treatment in accordance with CSA O80.
(d) chromated copper arsenate, Type C (CCA); All treated wood shall be substantially devoid of free
(e) ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA); surface preservative liquid and preservative deposits.

(f) alkaline copper quaternary, Type A (ACQ-A); 908.07.05 Use Category – The Use Category and the type
of preservative for treated wood materials shall be in
(g) alkaline copper quaternary, Type C (ACQ-C); accordance with the following requirements. If there is any
(h) alkaline copper quaternary, Type D (ACQ-D); or conflict between any of these requirements, the following
shall apply in the descending order of precedence:
(i) copper azole Type B (CA-B).
(a) Special Provisions;
908.07.02 Certified Treatment Facilities – All pressure
treated material shall come from a treatment plant/facility (b) Drawings;
that is certified under and in compliance with the Canadian (c) Related Standard Specifications as listed in SS 908.02;
Wood Preservation Certification Authority (CWPCA)
program. (d) SS 908 and

A copy of the CWPCA certificate and certification letter


must be submitted to the Ministry Representative upon
request.
(e) Table 908-B; and lastly 908.08.02 Wood Treated with CCA, ACZA, ACQ-A,
ACQ-C, ACQ-D, or CA-B – All hardware, fasteners and
(f) CSA O80, Table 2 “Use categories for specific
metal work used in permanent structures shall be hot-dipped
products, uses and exposures”.
galvanized in accordance with the ASTM A123,
908.07.06 Pre-cut or Field Treat – Cutting, framing, and ASTM A153 (Class D) or ASTM A653 (G185 coating
boring of timbers to receive preservative treatment shall be class) as applicable. Nails, spikes and sheet metal
done before treatment insofar as possible. In the event that fastenings shall be 304 or 316 stainless steel when specified.
cutting or drilling becomes necessary after treatment, a field
908.08.03 Galvanized fastenings – Galvanized nuts shall
treatment preservative specified in CSA O80 or the
be retapped to allow for the increased diameter of the bolt
AWPA M4 shall be used and applied in accordance to its
due to galvanizing. Heat-treated alloy components and
label. For bridge components, creosote and copper
fastenings that may be affected by the heat of the zinc bath
naphthenate shall be the only permitted field treatment
shall have corrosion protection provided by an alternate
preservatives. At least two coats shall be applied and where
means as approved by the Designer and the Ministry
possible, the colour of the preservative treatment used for
Representative.
protecting field cuts shall match the original preservative
treatment colour. 908.09 Handling of Treated Wood Products – All treated
wood materials shall be handled with reasonable care to
908.08 Hardware, Fasteners and Metalwork
prevent damage of the pressure-treated surface such as
908.08.01 General – All hardware, fasteners and metal puncture, cutting or crushing of fibre. Severely damaged
work in contact with treated wood products used in pieces will be rejected at the discretion of the Ministry
permanent structures shall be stainless steel or hot-dipped Representative.
galvanized in accordance with the ASTM A123,
ASTM A153 (Class D) or ASTM A653 (G90 coating class)
as applicable.

o 2020 908 2 of 4
Vol. 2 Page 395 of 452
SECTION 908 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT – WOOD PRODUCTS

Table 908-B: Use Category

Use Category per


Type of Wood Product
CSA O80
All treated wood products exposed to brackish water or salt water UC 5A
Cribbing, ballast walls UC 4.2
Timber for bridge barrier and railings UC 4.2
Timber for bridge decks, floor beams, stringers * UC 4.2
Glued-Laminated Timber (see SS 905) UC 4.2
Round Timber Piles, Pile Cap Beams and Pile Bracing (see SS 906) UC 4.2
Sign Posts and associated components (see SS 635) UC 4.1
Roadside guardrail posts and other guardrail components (see SS 312 and SS 604) UC 4.2
UC 4.1
Pedestrian and cyclist railings (excluding bridge barrier and roadside guardrail) (using preservative safe
for pedestrian contact)
Wood Fence Posts and associated wood fence components (see SS 700, SS 741, and SS 909) UC 4.1
* Bridge deck running planks do not require preservative treatment

Subject to the approval of the Ministry Representative, the of quality control inspection reports, worksheets, checklists,
Contractor shall treat any small areas of superficial damage testing and data verification and types of treatments.
of treated wood materials using the field treatment methods
Quality control shall include plant inspection of treated
specified in CSA O80 or AWPA M4. For bridge
wood products before, during, and after preservative
components, creosote and copper naphthenate shall be the
pressure treatment to ensure the final treated wood products
only permitted field treatment preservatives. At least two
meet these specifications.
coats shall be applied and where possible, the colour of the
preservative treatment used for repair shall match the Copies of any quality control records for any treatment
original preservative treatment colour. At the sole charge and treatment test shall be made available to the
discretion of the Ministry Representative, treated wood Ministry Representative upon request.
materials which cannot be made acceptable by such
methods will be rejected. 908.10.02 Third Party Inspection - Quality control shall
include third-party inspection. Third-party quality control
When unloading at the Site, the various pieces shall be inspections must be performed at the treatment plant.
sorted and stacked in such a manner as to require a
The third-party inspection agency shall meet the one of the
minimum of re-handling before being placed in the
following requirements:
structure.
The Contractor shall make good, at the Contractor's • Accreditation by the American Lumber Standard
expense, any damage to treated wood materials supplied Committee (ALSC) under their treated wood
and/or supplied by the Ministry after having taken delivery program, or,
of same. • Experience acceptable to the Ministry
908.10 Quality Control at Treatment Plant Representative and the Contractor.

908.10.01 General – A quality control program shall be The third-party inspection agency and the Ministry
implemented at the treatment plant in accordance with Representative shall have safe access to all parts of the
CSA O80, CWPCA, and AWPA M3. Treated products treatment facility and shall be supplied information and
shall be inspected in accordance with AWPA M2. assistance as required.

The quality control program shall include conducting and The third-party inspection agency shall provide an
applying all quality control steps and inspections, including inspection report that confirms the treated wood conforms
third-party inspections, as per industry standards and as to the preservation requirements of CSA O80 and/or where
required to meet these specifications. The quality control applicable AWPA U1 and AWPA T1 and/or the WWPI
program shall maintain and properly document all records BMPs. Inspected material meeting these requirements shall
be stamped with a certification mark. Alternatively, for

o 2020 908 3 of 4
Vol. 2 Page 396 of 452
SECTION 908 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT – WOOD PRODUCTS

round fence posts or when otherwise acceptable to the at any time during business hours, to conduct quality
Ministry Representative, the third-party inspection agency assurance inspections and testing. QA may be performed
shall provide a certificate of compliance that confirms that on the wood product or treatment products at any time,
the inspected material has been treated in accordance with including before, during, and after treatment.
CSA O80.
The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative at
Inspection reports must indicate both the “Use Category” least ten (10) full working days before the material is ready
and the type of preservative used. for quality assurance inspection prior to shipment.
Inspection reports shall be submitted to the Ministry The Ministry inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of
Representative prior to the material being incorporated into responsibility to provide fully compliant treated wood
the Work and shall be made available to the Contractor and products, including grade stamps or certificates of
the treatment facility. compliance.
No material shall be shipped prior to completion of the The Contractor shall provide the necessary facilities to
third-party inspection indicating that the treated products enable the Ministry Representative to expeditiously
meet the specified requirements. examine as many pieces as are deemed necessary.
908.11 Quality Assurance – The Ministry may implement 908.12 Approval of Materials – Inspection of treated wood
a quality assurance program by auditing the Contractor's products before shipment shall not prevent its subsequent
quality control program and by inspection and testing at its rejection at the Site if found to fail any requirements of the
discretion. The Ministry reserves the right to conduct specifications.
whatever tests are deemed necessary to confirm that the
Rejected material (after maximum allowance is reached per
material complies with the requirements of this
CSA O80) shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense
specification before a release for shipment is issued.
including shipping charges and removal of rejected
The Ministry may elect to arrange for its own quality materials if applicable.
assurance inspection of any products by a lumber grading
Any rejected material shall be removed from the Site and
agency accredited by the CLSAB, the ALSC, and/or a third
replaced at the Contractor’s expense immediately after
party inspection company, before or after shipment to the
notification.
Site.
Ministry costs for re-inspection or re-testing for rejected
The Ministry Representative or delegate shall be granted
material shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
complete access to the treatment plant and all its facilities,

o 2020 908 4 of 4
Vol. 2 Page 397 of 452
SECTION 909

TREATED WOOD FENCE PRODUCTS

909.01 Scope – This Section covers the quality and (b) Holes (except for test purposes, which shall be properly
manufacturing requirements for preservative Pressure plugged);
Treated Wood Fence Products (“Fence Products”) such as
(c) Nails, spikes and other metal or foreign substances;
fence posts, gateposts, braces, and droppers used in Ministry
Work. (d) Loose or unsound knots including spike knots and knot
clusters;
Treated wood shall meet the requirements of SS 909 as well
as the product-specific requirements in the following related (e) Excessive sweep, reverse sweep and short crook;
Standard Specification sections:
(f) Cracks, splits or through checks, other than limited
• SS 700 – Wildlife Exclusion Fencing defects as defined below;
• SS 741 – Fence Construction (g) Shakes in the top or butt, and
• SS 908 – Preservative Treatment – Wood Products (h) Unsound scars (cat faces).
909.02 General – Fence Products shall be supplied in the 909.05.02 Limited Defects – All round fence posts and
sizes, species, and grading specified, in conformity with this braces are permitted limited, in the opinion of the Ministry
Section, and as generally shown on the applicable drawings Representative, defects as follows:
in SS 700 and SS 741. (a) Season checks less than 10 mm in width if less than
Fence Products shall be newly manufactured products. 500 mm in length, or less than 5 mm in width if more
Previously used Fence Products are not accepted for the than 500 mm in length.
Work. (b) The depth of splits or checks shall not exceed the depth
909.03 Material – Wood Species – All Fence Products of 40% of the post diameter or thickness, regardless of
such as round fence posts (including line, straining, corner, their length or width.
intersection, gate and end posts) and any required round (c) Sound scars (cat faces) permitted if the depth of the
wood braces and droppers shall be Lodgepole Pine or Jack trimmed scar is less than 20 mm in depth, less than
Pine cut from live growing trees. 300 mm in length, and which does not impair strength
Use of other species or use of wood not cut from live trees and durability
(such as from slash piles, blown down trees, or kill stands) (d) Sound, tight, well-spaced knots permitted provided
must be as specified in the Contract, Drawings or Special they do not exceed 38 mm in diameter
Provisions or must be approved in writing by the Ministry
Representative prior to supply. Cedar, either split or whole, (e) Insect damage consisting of holes 1.6 mm or less in
will not be approved. diameter. Scoring or channelling of the surface is
permitted. All other forms of insect damage are
Tree species not meeting specified requirements are subject prohibited.
to rejection with no payment to the Supplier and/or
Contractor. (f) Two coats of field treatment preservative shall be
applied to splits and checks that meet the criteria for
909.04 Preservation Preparation and Wood Quality – limited defects and that occur after pressure treatment.
All fence posts and bracing shall be clean peeled with
minimum removal of sapwood for their full length with all 909.06 Treated Material Requirements
bark and cambium removed, and free from glazed surfacing 909.06.01 General – Round wood posts, sawn timber posts
left by dried sap. and other wood fence components shall be treated in
All materials shall have sufficient sapwood in the outer accordance with SS 908 and this Section.
periphery to obtain the specified penetration of preservative. Where applicable, treatment to “refusal” shall be as defined
All sound knots or projections shall be shaved smooth and in CSA O80:
flush with the surface of surrounding wood. Treatment to refusal (refusal treatment) — treatment
909.05 Defects of wood under specified conditions until the quantity of
preservative absorbed during two consecutive half-
909.05.01 Prohibited Defects – All round fence posts and hours is not more than 2% of the amount already
braces shall be free of the following defects: injected.
(a) Decay, rot, stain and red heart;

BC MoTI SS 2020 909 (1 of 2)


Vol. 2 Page 398 of 452
SECTION 909 TREATED WOOD FENCE PRODUCTS

909.06.02 Round Fence Posts and Braces Dimensions – The top (smaller diameter) end of the post shall be
All dimensions shall apply inside the bark and to the fully domed (chamfered) or rounded 15 mm to 30 mm at
seasoned and treated fence posts or braces. approximately 30º to 45º around the circumference
edge.
(a) Dimensions
909.06.03 Sawn Lumber Posts and Braces – Gate posts
(i) Diameter Class – Round fence posts and braces
and braces not stipulated as round, together with any anchor
shall be classified as to size on the basis of the
cleats, shall be Standard and Better S4S Lodgepole Pine,
smaller diameter and length.
Jack Pine or Coast Douglas Fir, to the current NLGA
(ii) Length and Diameter – Wood post length and grading rules and in the required lengths and sizes.
diameter shall be as specified SS 700 and SS 741
909.06.04 Fence Droppers Dimensions – Wood droppers
and their respective SP Drawings or as specified in
to stabilize barbed wire fencing (Type C) between posts
the Contract.
shall be one of the following:
The diameter specified shall be the minimum with
• Round fence posts Lodgepole Pine, Jack Pine of
a tolerance of +20 mm and the length shall not vary
50 mm (smaller) diameter, or
by more than ±25 mm from that specified.
(iii) Taper – The maximum permitted taper shall be • 25 mm x 50 mm sawn lumber, Standard and better,
such that the larger diameter shall not exceed that S4S, Lodgepole Pine, Jack Pine or Coast Douglas
of the specified diameter by more than 25 mm over Fir, to the current NLGA grading rules,
a 2 m length of post or brace. • 50 mm x 50 mm sawn lumber, Standard and better,
The maximum permitted taper shall be S4S, Lodgepole Pine, Jack Pine or Coast Douglas
proportional for posts and braces of lengths other Fir, to the current NLGA grading rules.
than 2 m. Wood dropper length shall be as specified SS 700 and
In cases where the post or brace is not truly SS 741 and their respective SP Drawings or as specified in
circular, the diameter shall be obtained by the Contract.
measuring the circumference and dividing by 3.14. 909.07 Pressure Treatment
(iv) Straightness (Sweep) – When dried, all posts shall 909.07.01 Sampling Zone – The sample zone for
be: penetration and retention shall be to at least a depth of
• straight; 25 mm from the surface.
909.07.02 Preservative Penetration and Retention –
• free from sweep, short crooks or reverse
Retention and penetration shall be in accordance with
sweep; and
SS 908, as per CSA O80 UC4.1.
• free of bends in more than one plane.
For sawn or dressed fence braces, anchor cleats and
Straightness shall be measured by a straight line droppers, the Ministry Representative may accept a
joining the mid-point of the butt and the mid-point preservative penetration depth “to refusal” upon review of
of the tip. the plant records of penetration time applied for these types
of Fence Products.
The straight line shall not fall outside the body of
the post, nor be more than 50 mm from the The treatment plant shall be responsible to certify and
geometric centre of the post at any point. document that the final Fence Products meet the minimum
retention and penetration requirements.
(b) Post Ends – Ends of posts and braces shall be cut
square to the specified length and, unless otherwise Materials not meeting the minimum specified penetration
specified, the butt end (larger diameter) shall be depths may be rejected by the Ministry Representative at the
machine “pencil” pointed or chiselled before treatment Supplier’s or Contractor’s expense.
to permit driving of posts.
909.08 Quality Assurance – The Ministry Representative
The diameter at the point shall be not less than 18 mm may conduct, or may have a third-party conduct, quality
and not more than 35 mm, and the pointing shall extend assurance testing and reviews.
over a length of 150 mm to 200 mm of the post, or
opposite sides shall be tapered to a "chisel point" of
similar basic dimensions.

BC MoTI SS 2020 909 (2 of 2)


Vol. 2 Page 399 of 452
SECTION 911

STEEL AND IRON

911.01 Scope – This standard only applies to materials used wrought iron; they shall be round or square as specified.
in the maintenance and rehabilitation of existing log and Round washers shall be according to Canadian
timber bridges and log or timber components such as log Manufacturer's Standards. Square washers shall be made to
crib retaining walls, timber piers, wood sign structures, etc. the dimensions called for on the Drawings.
911.02 Materials – These materials shall be in accordance 911.10 Ogee Washers – Ogee washers shall be of cast
with the current editions of the following Specifications: iron. The proportions of these washers adopted by some of
the manufacturers differ somewhat in detail, but to be
• Structural Steel, CSA G40.21 Grade 260 or better acceptable the diameter should not be less than four times
• Steel Bolts, ASTM A307 the diameter of the bolt for which it is to be used and the
thickness should be approximately equal to the diameter of
• Steel Nuts, ASTM A563 the bolt.
• Carbon Steel Castings, ASTM A27 911.11 Special Castings – Special castings shall be true
• Iron Castings, ASTM A48 to pattern, free from excessive shrinkage or overrun, be
made in accordance with good work practice, and be free
• Pipe Steel, ASTM A53 from defects. Castings, which show defects after machining,
will be rejected notwithstanding any previous acceptance at
911.03 Tension and Lateral Rods – Tension and lateral
the manufacturer's works.
rods shall be of structural steel. Upset ends shall be upset
by hand or machine and welds will not be allowed. The 911.12 Steel Splice-Joint Fastenings – Plates and bars,
dimensions of upset ends shall be made as shown on the etc., for these joints shall be of structural steel. All parts
Drawings. When upsetting by machine, the ends shall be shall be made in accordance with the Drawings. Bolt holes
upset to a little oversize, after which they should be heated shall be drilled from the solid or sub-punched and reamed.
to welding temperature and then swaged to the proper size. In sub-punched and reamed work, the holes shall be
The nuts shall be made hexagonal, U.S. Standard sizes and punched 3/16" smaller and after assembling, reamed 1/16"
threads. The threads on rods and nuts shall be full, smooth, larger than the nominal diameter of the bolt.
uniform and of the same pitch throughout. They shall be
911.13 Galvanizing – Unless otherwise specified, all
such that the nuts can be run on by hand the full length of
steel hardware, steel fasteners and other steelwork shall be
the threads on the rods without showing undue or uneven
galvanized. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM
slackness.
A123 or ASTM A153, as applicable.
911.04 Machine Bolts – Machine bolts shall conform to
911.14 Plates – The various plates designated on the
ASTM A307.
Drawings as gib, bearing, bed, joint, lateral, etc., shall be of
911.05 Carriage Bolts – Carriage bolts shall conform to structural steel.
ASTM A307. They shall be of the common type with
911.15 Welding – Welding shall conform to the
button head, square neck and square or hex nut.
requirements of CSA W59.
911.06 Drift Bolts or Pins – Drift bolts or pins shall be
of structural steel. They shall be cut from plain, round bars 911.16 Pipe Fastenings – Pipe fastenings shall be
unless otherwise called for on the Drawings. The ends of Schedule 80 pipe. Nuts shall be hexagonal machine lock
drift pins or bolts shall be tapered or shaped so that the pin nuts, U.S. Standard as to outside dimensions and threads.
may be easily driven into pre-bored holes in the wood being The threads on nuts and pipes shall be full, smooth, uniform
fastened. and of the same pitch; they shall be such that they can be
run on by hand the full length of the thread on pipe without
911.07 Dowels – Dowels shall be of structural steel. They undue or uneven slackness.
shall be cut from plain round bars and any ragged ends shall
be removed. 911.17 Cleaning and Painting – Painting of steel and
iron components shall be in accordance with SS 216.10
911.08 Lag Screws – Lag screws shall conform to ASME Application Methods (Excluding metalizing and Hot Dip
B18.2.1, be made of steel that meets or exceeds the galvanizing). No paint shall be applied to surfaces which
properties of ASTM A307 Grade A or SAE J429 Grade 1, are to be encased in concrete.
and have square heads and cone points.
911.18 Machine Finished Surfaces – Machine finished
911.09 Plate Washers or Wrought Washers – Plate surfaces and threaded ends of tension and lateral rods shall
washers or wrought washers shall be of structural steel or be coated with an anti-corrosion lubricant applied as soon

BC MoTI SS 2020 911 (1 of 2)


Vol. 2 Page 400 of 452
SECTION 911 STEEL AND IRON
as the surfaces and threads are finished and accepted by the Representative in the inspection of both material and quality
Inspector. of work. The Ministry Representative may reject material
which does not meet the requirements of the Contract.
911.19 Inspection – All materials and quality of work
Rejected material or poor quality of work shall be replaced
shall be subject to inspection by the Ministry
promptly with materials meeting the requirements and
Representative. The Contractor shall allow the Ministry
quality at no cost to the Ministry.
Representative free access to the shops at all times when
work on the materials is being done and the Contractor shall 911.20 Shipping – The threaded ends of all rods shall be
provide every reasonable facility to assist the Ministry protected from damage.

BC MoTI SS 2020 911 (2 of 2)


Vol. 2 Page 401 of 452
SECTION 941

PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

941.01 Scope – This Section covers the quality and 941.02.02 Concrete Mix Design - Concrete shall meet the
manufacture of precast reinforced concrete roadside and following requirements:
median barriers for highway and other off-highway traffic
(a) Minimum specified 28 day compressive strength of
confinement use.
32 MPa.
The concrete traffic barrier units shall be supplied in the sizes
(b) Class of exposure C-2.
and types as required by the Contract, Purchase Order, Work
Order or Drawings in strict conformity with this Section and (c) Maximum water/cementitious material ratio (W/Cm) of
pertinent SS Drawings of the SP941 Series. 0.45.
941.02 Concrete (d) Coarse aggregate of a nominal maximum size either
20 mm or 28 mm.
941.02.01 Concrete Quality
(a) Concrete quality shall conform to CSA A23.1 and CSA (e) Maximum Plasticized Slump of 80 mm  20 mm.
A23.2 except where amended hereafter. SS 211 shall (f) Air content of 4 to 7%.
only apply when specifically referenced.
941.02.03 Self-Consolidating Concrete – Self-
(b) The manufacturer shall implement a quality control Consolidating Concrete (SCC) may be used in the
program to meet the specified requirements. The quality manufacture of precast concrete barrier, but only under the
control plan shall be made available to the Ministry following conditions:
Representative for review.
(a) The self-consolidating concrete mix shall conform to the
(c) The Ministry may implement a quality assurance requirements of CSA A23.1, including Clause 8.6 and
program by auditing the manufacturer’s quality control Table 22, and
program and by inspection and testing at its discretion.
(b) The Contractor shall submit the following for review
(d) When requested by the Ministry Representative, the upon request by the Ministry Representative:
manufacturer shall submit concrete mix design
information, using the requirements of CSA A23.1 (i) a full copy of the applicable concrete mix design
Table 5, Alternative 1, for Ministry quality assurance and utilized in the manufacture of precast concrete
compliance review. barrier, which may include a slump greater than that
specified in SS 941.02.02(e); and
(e) A compressive strength test result is defined as the
average of the strengths of three 28 day compressive test (ii) Documentation in accordance with either of the
cylinder breaks. following:

(f) The strength level of the concrete represented by the test (A) Details in accordance with CSA A23.2-24C
shall be considered satisfactory if the test result equals or documenting the proven history of successful
exceeds 32 MPa and no individual cylinder strength is performance for the required strength, durability,
less than 28.5 MPa. If this condition is not met, the and other performance requirements of the
concrete will be considered to have failed the strength proposed mix design in the manufacture of
requirements. No other form of testing to prove the precast concrete barrier, or
relative strength at a later date will be allowed without (B) A full-scale test shall be used to verify the self-
the approval of the Ministry Representative. consolidating characteristics for placement and
(g) Concrete testing cylinders shall be cast by the precast for the hardened concrete properties of the mix
concrete manufacturer or their authorized representative design for the precast concrete barrier.
at the time of placing concrete. Frequency of testing will Documentation in accordance with CSA A23.2-
be one cylinder collected at the start of placement, at the 24C shall be submitted demonstrating that the
mid-way point and at the end of placement of the proposed mix design will achieve the required
concrete used for the making of the barrier with that batch strength, durability, and performance
run. Concrete cylinder samples may be collected by the requirements.
Ministry Representative at any time and tested to ensure
the concrete is meeting specification requirements.
(h) Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride shall not be used in the concrete.

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (1 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 402 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

941.03 Reinforcing Steel, Fibrillated Fibres, Attachment the category of “Additional Paint Coatings – Zinc-Rich
Hardware & Miscellaneous Items Touch-up Paint and Primers”.
941.03.01 Steel Mesh Reinforcement – Welded steel wire 941.03.04 Pick-up Point Forming – Pick-up points for
mesh reinforcement shall be supplied and installed in each handling units shall be formed with accurately placed rigid
section as shown on the SS Drawings, and in accordance with P.V.C. or steel pipe recessed 15 mm from both finished
SS 412. Additional reinforcement may be installed to assist surfaces as detailed.
handling during the precasting operations but shall be subject
941.03.05 Optional Features – Where barrier is ordered with
to prior approval by the Ministry Representative.
drainage slots or grouting holes or both, they shall be
941.03.02 Fibre Reinforcement – Fibrillated Fibres accurately cast-in as detailed. Facilities for the installation of
(polyolefin or polypropylene or a blend of these fibres) are an anti-glare screens will be detailed as and when required.
acceptable substitute of welded wire mesh. Fibrillated fibres
941.04 Placing and Finishing of Concrete
shall meet requirements of ASTM C1116 Synthetic Fiber
Reinforced Concrete, Type III fibre. 941.04.01 Placing and Consolidating – Concrete shall be
placed in the forms and carefully consolidated in strict
Fibres shall have a minimum length of 50 mm, added at a
accordance with CSA A23.4, Clause 21.
dosage rate of 1 kg/m3 (min of 0.1% by volume) and shall be
thoroughly mixed with concrete before placement into the 941.04.02 Curing and Protection – Curing and protection
forms. shall be carried out strictly according to CSA A23.4,
Clause 23 and as follows:
Fibres shall have a minimum tensile strength of 350 MPa and
a minimum modulus of elasticity of 4.2 GPa. (a) Curing shall be considered complete when test cylinders
reach the specified 28-day compressive strength provided
Fibres are to be added early in the mixing process following
such strength is reached not later than 28 days after the
the manufacturer’s recommendations to ensure evenly
barriers are cast.
distributed fibres.
(b) Steam curing is permissible for either the entire curing
The supplier/manufacturer of the fibre must furnish test data
period or portion thereof and shall be carried out in
in accordance with ASTM C1399 to the precast concrete
accordance with CSA A23.4, Clause 23.2.3.
manufacturer to show the fibre complies with the
specification requirements as part of the precast concrete (c) At no time during or at completion of the curing period
manufacturer’s quality control plan. shall the temperature differential between the concrete
surface and the ambient temperature be greater than
When the fibre option is used, a single length of 15 mm rebar
20°C.
shall be wire tied to the horizontal sections of the hook or eye
assemblies as shown on the SS Drawings. (d) If steam is used for a portion of the curing period,
additional normal curing shall be carried out after the
Steel fibres shall not be used in the concrete mix for concrete
steam curing, according to CSA A23.4 Clause 23 until
barriers.
such time as strength tests of concrete test cylinders that
941.03.03 Steel for Anchors – Steel for anchors shall have been both steam and normally cured with the
conform to CSA G40.21-M Grade 260W and shall be barriers reach the specified concrete strength.
carefully bent to the radii detailed and installed as shown on
941.04.03 Exposed Surfaces – Exposed surfaces shall be
the SS Drawings.
uniform in texture and colour as produced from well-
The steel manufacturer shall provide, to the precast concrete maintained steel form surfaces and proper vibration methods
manufacturer, a certificate giving the results of each of the without excessive surface fines or laitance.
mechanical and chemical tests applicable to the steel material
941.04.04 Defects – Defects of the exposed surface will
produced, confirming that the material has been produced in
normally be cause for the rejection of any unit except where
accordance with the specified requirements. This certificate
such are within the permissible limits or are subject to making
shall be provided to the Ministry Representative upon request.
good as follows:
Bending shall be done by methods that will not produce
(a) Unobtrusive defects of any kind where their total area is
fracture or other injury. The metal heating shall not be to a
not in excess of 2% of the exposed surface area of the
higher temperature than that producing a "dark cherry red"
unit.
colour. After heating, the metal shall be cooled as slowly as
possible. Following the bending, the surface of the metal (b) Air holes not greater than 3 mm in diameter and not more
shall be carefully inspected for evidence of fracture, and any than twenty (20) holes in any isolated 300 mm X 300 mm
fractured pieces shall be replaced. area.
Prior to delivery, exposed surfaces of connections shall be (c) Sharp protrusions at the edges of the exposed surfaces
prepared for and given a heavy application of zinc rich coating where necessary shall be softened by careful rubbing or
selected from the Ministry’s Recognized Products List under grinding.

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (2 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 403 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

(d) Patching of isolated small holes, cavities and similar self- concerning the date when the order is to be manufactured, so
confining defects may be permitted when authorized in that the Ministry Quality Assurance may be carried out. All
writing by the Ministry Representative. processes shall be open for inspection and approval by the
Ministry Representative.
941.04.05 Patching – Patching, only when authorized by the
Ministry Representative, shall have the defective area well Material shipped prior to the inspection or written release for
saturated with water and the defect prepared with cement shipment by the Ministry Representative shall be at the
paste and filled with mortar. The mortar, properly Contractor’s risk (or supplier’s risk, where the Ministry is
proportioned of the same sand and cement as the original purchasing directly).
concrete and reasonably colour matched to the cured dry unit
The manufacturer's name or trademark, year of manufacture
with the addition of white cement where necessary, shall be
and form number shall be embedded on the end of each unit
pre-shrunk for about one hour before re-tempering and use.
in a manner, size and depth that are permanently legible.
The patching mortar shall be well tooled in, finished flush and
smooth and the area covered to cure adequately. Authorized patching or making good may be inspected before
shipment or upon delivery and the rejected unit(s) shall be
941.04.06 All concrete surfaces prior to shipment shall be
replaced at no cost to the Ministry.
accurate to detail and, in particular at the end connections, true
to dimension tolerances. End connection surfaces shall be 941.07 Handling – In handling the finished product, the
cleared out of any out-of-tolerance material, to allow a secure concrete and connecting devices shall not be damaged or
connection between components. distorted.
941.05 Tolerances – Allowable Tolerances for the concrete 941.08 Payment – Payment shall be at Unit Price bid per unit
dimensions of the barriers shall be  3 mm except as (section). The price bid shall be full compensation for
otherwise indicated on the detail drawings. everything furnished and done including, but not limited to,
supply of forms and all materials, placing, vibrating, curing,
941.06 Procedure of Manufacture – The Contractor (or the
quality control, concrete quality control testing, stripping,
manufacturer, if the Ministry is purchasing directly) shall
finishing, general clean-up and delivery.
notify the Ministry a minimum of seven (7) days in advance

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (3 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 404 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (4 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 405 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (5 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 406 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (6 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 407 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (7 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 408 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (8 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 409 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (9 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 410 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (10 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 411 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (11 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 412 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (12 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 413 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (13 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 414 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (14 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 415 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (15 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 416 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (16 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 417 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (17 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 418 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (18 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 419 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (19 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 420 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (20 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 421 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (21 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 422 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (22 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 423 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (23 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 424 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (24 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 425 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (25 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 426 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (26 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 427 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (27 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 428 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (28 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 429 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (29 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 430 of 452
SECTION 941 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 941 (30 of 30)


Vol. 2 Page 431 of 452
SECTION 942

PRECAST CONCRETE INTERLOCKING MODULAR BLOCKS

942.01 Scope – This Section covers the quality and • form number.
manufacture of precast concrete interlocking modular
blocks (Interlocking Blocks) made using wet-cast concrete 942.12 Shear Keys – Interlocking Blocks shall have
supplied for Ministry use. engineered interlocking shear keys with no more than
12 mm of design clearance around the shear key. The shear
This standard specification covers only Interlocking Blocks keys shall be cast integrally with the block and shall provide
that have the following nominal dimensions: shear strength across the interface between courses of the
Interlocking Blocks.
• Full-sized blocks: 750 mm height x 750 mm depth
x 1500 mm long. The shear key shall be designed to allow interlocking
• Half sized blocks: 750 mm height x 750 mm depth • in a linear installation in running bond and stack
x 750 mm long. bond layouts, and
• Compatible corner blocks and other partial sized or • at ninety degrees (90°) corners
special purpose blocks for use with the full-sized
The interface shear strength between the courses of
blocks
Interlocking Blocks and the shear key strength shall be
Requirements for other block sizes, types and proprietary adequate to resist earth pressure forces of ten metres (10 m)
systems will be specified in the Contract. in height. Engineered documentation and test results that
demonstrate the interface shear strength and shear key
Interlocking Blocks shall be supplied in the sizes and types
strength shall be submitted to the Ministry Representative
as required by purchase order or Contract/Drawing
for compliance review upon request.
requirements, and shall comply with this Section unless
otherwise specified by the Contract or Purchase Order. Bench style and wall top course Interlocking Blocks shall
have a flat top surface (i.e. without shear keys) with recessed
942.02 Definition of Precast Concrete Interlocking
galvanized lifting loops.
Modular Blocks (“Interlocking Blocks”) – Precast
monolithic concrete blocks with interlocking shear keys of 942.13 Lifting Loop Strands – Interlocking Blocks shall
specified dimensions made from wet-cast concrete for use have galvanized steel lifting loops engineered by a
in the construction of an engineered gravity retaining wall professional engineer registered with the Association of
or an engineered mechanically stabilized earth (MSE) wall. Professional Engineers and Geoscientists of BC, and be
designed so that the block can be lifted and positioned using
only a standard hook or clevis.
MATERIALS
Lifting loops shall be fabricated from 12.5 mm or 16 mm
942.10 Provision of Interlocking Blocks – Interlocking nominal diameter 7-wire zinc coated steel wire strand. Zinc
Blocks shall be manufactured to comply with the design of coated 7-wire strand shall be in accordance with ASTM
a proprietary product listed on the Ministry’s Recognized A475 or CSA G12 Class A zinc coating.
Products List (RPL).
Lifting loops shall be anchored and embedded sufficiently
The Recognized Product List is available on-line at: into the block to safely enable lifting and handling of the
blocks.
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tra
nsportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards- Lift points shall be designed and installed directly above the
guidelines/recognized-products-list centre of mass of the block and in a manner that will allow
them to remain in place and not interfere with full concrete-
942.11 Details of Interlocking Blocks – All block edges,
on-concrete bearing when blocks are stacked on top of each
except the shear key and corresponding socket, shall have a
other.
40 ± 20 mm chamfer.
Installation shall not require the lift points to be removed.
Dimension tolerances shall be + 15 mm.
942.14 Concrete Quality
All Interlocking Blocks require the following identification
information to be cast into the end of each block, in a All concrete material and work shall be in accordance with
manner, size and depth to be permanently legible: SS 211 except as modified by this SS 942.
• manufacturer’s name or trademark, Material shall be new or virgin and contain no Recycled
Concrete Aggregate Material (RCAM).
• date of manufacture, and

o 2020 942 1 of 3
Vol. 2 Page 432 of 452
SECTION 942 PRECAST CONCRETE
INTERLOCKING MODULAR BLOCKS

Concrete shall meet the requirements of Table 942-A. • Open pockets not greater than 6 mm in diameter
and not more in number than twenty (20) in any
Table 942-A: Concrete Mix Requirements 300 mm x 300 mm area.
(b) Repair Products – Approved repairs shall be done
Property Requirement using approved patching materials from the
Minimum 28 day compressive Recognized Products List for patching of isolated small
32 MPa holes, cavities and similar self-confining defects of the
strength
Interlocking Blocks in order to restore the durability of
Air Content 5% to 7% the block.
Nominal Maximum Size of Coarse The patching material shall provide a reasonable colour
28 mm
Aggregate match to the cured dry Interlocking Block, be well
Maximum Plasticized Slump 80 ± 20 mm tooled in, be finished flush and smooth, and cured
adequately, using water or a curing compound.
Maximum water/cementitious
0.40 942.16 MSE Walls – All connections between the MSE
materials ratio by weight
wall soil reinforcement elements and the Interlocking
Minimum cement content 320 kg/m3 Blocks shall be in accordance with the Ministry’s
Supplement to CSA S6, and the design shall be prepared by
942.15 Finished Surface of Concrete – Concrete for a professional engineer registered with the Association of
Interlocking Blocks shall be poured monolithically, with no Professional Engineers and Geoscientists of BC.
cold joints. (i.e. continuously poured until the concrete is Modifications to the Interlocking Blocks for the soil
level with the top edge of the form.) reinforcement connections shall comply with the
All surfaces shall have a smooth finish conforming to CSA engineered connection design details.
A23.4 Section 26.2.3 “Standard Grade” with a uniform 942.17 Quality Control Requirements for Interlocking
finish. There shall be no pronounced texture and fins shall Blocks – The manufacturer of the Interlocking Blocks shall
be removed. There shall be no open pockets or distortions have a Quality Control Plan in place in order to ensure and
in excess of 12 mm. document compliance with the Contract requirements. This
Project-specific architectural finishes or types of the plan shall be submitted to the Contractor and the Ministry
exposed face shall be as specified in the Contract. Representative for compliance review upon request.

Consistency of the concrete finish for the Interlocking Manufacturers failing to meet the Contract requirements
Blocks for the project shall be maintained by using the same shall take immediate remedial steps to become compliant.
concrete mix and the same type of form oil. In addition to the quality control requirements of SS 211,
Interlocking Blocks shall be sound and free of cracks or the Contractor shall extract a set of two 100 mm diameter
other defects that interfere with the proper placement of the by 200 mm long cores from one block prior to delivery to
block. Interlocking Blocks having cracks or spalling that the Site.
are continuous through any solid element of the block shall The cores shall be taken in the middle of the block along the
be rejected regardless of the width or length. back face so that the block may still be used if specifications
All sharp or protruding surfaces of the Interlocking Blocks are met. The cored holes shall be patched and cured using
by careful rubbing or grinding. approved materials from the Recognized Products List.

942.15.01 Defects – Structurally defective or damaged For projects with more than 50 blocks, a minimum of one
Interlocking Blocks, as well as those with defects outside set of cores shall be extracted for every full or partial lot of
the limits specified in SS 941.15.01(a) shall be cause for 50 blocks supplied.
rejection. The Contractor shall ensure that the core test results are
(a) Repair of Limited Defects – Subject to the approval traceable to every other block cast from the same concrete
batch and every other block in the 50-block lot. Only
of the Ministry Representative, non-structural defects, Blocks with traceable testing documentation will be
within the limits identified below, may be repaired: accepted for use.
• Surface defects where their total area is not in
excess of 2% of the exposed surface area of the One of these cores will be tested for the compressive
unit. strength in accordance with CSA A23.2-14C and
CSA A23.2-9C.

o 2020 942 2 of 3

Vol. 2 Page 433 of 452


SECTION 942 PRECAST CONCRETE
INTERLOCKING MODULAR BLOCKS

The second core shall be tested for air void analysis in The Ministry Representative reserves the right to conduct
accordance with ASTM C457. any Quality Assurance testing deemed necessary to confirm
Interlocking Blocks comply with the specifications before
The evaluation of the results from the testing of the cores
Interlocking Blocks are accepted for final payment.
shall be in accordance with CSA A23.1.
The Ministry Representative reserves the right to reject any
The Ministry may reject the whole lot of blocks represented
or all Interlocking Blocks based on visual and non-
by the initial or subsequent core testing if the core tests fail
destructive methods.
to meet the Contract Specifications.
942.18 Quality Assurance of Interlocking Blocks – The
Ministry Representative may elect to carry out Quality PAYMENT
Assurance of the manufacturer’s fabrication facility and
942.90 Payment – Payment for INTERLOCKING
processes and/or the Interlocking Blocks.
BLOCKS shall be at the applicable Unit Prices for the
The manufacturer’s facility and the Interlocking Blocks Item(s) listed in the Schedule of Approximate Quantities
shall be accessible to the Ministry Representative for and Unit Prices and shall be full compensation for
inspection, testing, quality assurance and quality audit everything furnished and done including, but not limited to,
purposes at all times during manufacturing and shipping of equipment, labour, quality control, supply of forms and all
Interlocking Blocks. materials, placing, vibrating and curing air entrained
concrete, stripping, finishing, patching and repairs, general
All testing, material, and Quality Control records shall be
clean-up and delivery of all Interlocking Blocks at Site.
made available to the Ministry Representative upon request.
Rejected Interlocking Blocks shall be replaced at the
The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative a
Contractor’s expense including shipping charges and
minimum of fourteen (14) days in advance of the date the
removal of rejected Interlocking Blocks from site and from
Interlocking Blocks are to proposed to be shipped to allow
constructed walls.
the Ministry Representative an opportunity to inspect the
Interlocking Blocks before delivery.
Patching and/or repair of defects may be inspected before
shipment, or upon delivery, and the rejected unit(s) shall be
replaced at no cost to the Ministry.

o 2020 942 3 of 3

Vol. 2 Page 434 of 452


SECTION 952

CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

952.01 Scope – This Section describes the requirements for 952.02.02 Quality Control Procedure – The Supplier may
the different types and grades of asphalt and paving be required to furnish the Contractor with an outline of the
materials to be supplied by the Contractor for highway use quality control procedures detailing the method of
as set out in the Special Provisions of the Contract. implementing the requirements of this Specification. This
outline shall include the following operations:
The materials so described are generally classified as
follows: • sampling and testing
• Asphalt Cements • storage and handling
• Cutback Asphalts • shipping
• Asphalt Emulsions • recording and reporting.
• Tall Oil Pitch 952.02.03 Technical Requirements – The Contractor shall
ensure that the Supplier provides the following:
• Emulsified Products
(a) Batching and Batch Analysis: Each batch of product
The term “Supplier” referred to in this Section shall mean
covered by this Section shall be given a batch number
the party or parties manufacturing and supplying the
and be sampled and tested in accordance with the
Contractor with materials covered under this section, but the
applicable specification.
Contractor remains responsible to the Ministry for the
quality of the materials provided. The batch analysis must show the specification
requirements for the product tested, test method
The Ministry’s Recognized Product List referenced herein
employed, and the pertinent test results, as listed in
may be found online at:
Appendix 952-A.
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/driving-and-
The batch analysis shall also include:
transportation/transportation-infrastructure/engineering-
standards-and-guidelines/recognized-products- • Details of the raw materials and their dosages if
list/recognized_products_list.pdf?forcedownload=true engineered vegetable oils are uses as modifiers;
and
952.02 Quality Control Requirements
952.02.01 Quality Control Plan – The Supplier shall • a written declaration that none of the substances
develop and maintain a proven quality control plan in listed in SS 952.05(f) have been added.
accordance with the provisions of this Section and the The batch analysis shall be certified by an appropriately
Special Provisions. The plan shall ensure that adequate qualified and authorized representative of the Supplier.
inspection coverage is maintained throughout the entire
process of manufacture and shipping. All supplies The certified batch analysis shall be dispatched to the
processed or manufactured within the Supplier's plant or Contractor with the first load of material delivered.
procured from any other source shall receive sufficient Provided the batch from which shipments are drawn
inspection to ensure conformance specifications and remains the same and provided that the batch number
evidence of such inspections may be provided to the is shown on the Bill of Lading, no further batch analysis
Ministry Representative upon request. will be required for subsequent remaining shipments.
If, during the course of delivery, it is necessary to draw
Supplies not conforming to contractual requirements shall material from a different batch or batches of product,
not be offered for highway use until the deviations have the analysis of the replacement batch shall be sent out
been authorized by the Ministry Representative. with the first load of material from each and every
It shall be a responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that replacement batch.
all materials supplied satisfy the related Environmental and When certified batch results are not yet available, the
Health and Safety Regulations. Contractor may elect, at its own risk, to use the
Product discharged directly into tank cars or tank trucks uncertified material. If the material is subsequently
from "in line blending" facilities will be sampled as required determined to be non-compliant with the specifications
to ensure uniformity and to satisfy quality requirements. or certified batch results are not provided, remediation
of any Work using such material will be to the
Contractor’s account.

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (1 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 435 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

(b) Viscosity Chart (Absolute) shall include the initial 952.05 Asphalt Cement – Asphalt cements shall be subject
load and for each subsequent batch. If in-line blending to the following conditions:
is utilized, a new viscosity chart shall be issued should
(a) all supplied asphalt cement shall be Group A;
any change in viscosity occur.
(b) shall be products prepared by the refining of petroleum
952.03 Sampling and Testing – The Supplier shall retain
oils;
adequate sampling equipment, employ satisfactory
sampling procedures, and maintain the sampling program (c) shall be homogeneous, free from water, and shall not
and records. The Contractor shall obtain samples for quality foam when heated to 175°C;
assurance.
(d) shall conform to either the Pen Grade requirements
The Ministry has developed Technical Bulletin GM19001 specified in Table 952-D or the Performance Grade
Liquid Asphalt Sampling and Testing for the Ministry’s (PG) the requirements specified in Table 952-E, Table
Quality Audit, which may assist the Contractor in 952-F (for Polymer Modified Asphalt only) and Table
establishing its own quality assurance procedures. This 952-G;
Technical Bulletin is available at:
(e) shall not:
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/transpo
rtation-infrastructure/engineering-standards- (i) be air blown or catalytically oxidized in any way,
guidelines/technical-bulletins/geotechnical-materials (ii) contain any air blown or catalytically oxidized
Test methods for asphalt and paving materials shall residues, or
conform to the standard AASHTO tests listed in (iii) include residues caused by artificial distillation of
Table 952-A or ASTM tests listed in Table 952-B, coal, coal tar, or paraffin.
supplemented by such special tests as may be described
elsewhere to cover special or experimental type materials. Table 952-A: Standard Test Methods - AASHTO

On request by the Ministry Representative, the Contractor AASHTO TEST TITLE OF TEST:
shall provide samples, from the Supplier, of the product in DESIGNATION Standard Method of Test for…
quantities, not less than 4 L, as may be required for
independent testing purposes. Standard Specification for
M 320
Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder
952.04 Delivery of Asphalt and Paving Materials – The
Contractor must ensure the Supplier delivers asphalt and Standard Practice for Grading or
paving materials in good condition, of uniformity of R 29 Verifying the Performance Grade
product, for any special storage requirements and at correct (PG) of an Asphalt Binder
temperature to the specified delivery point T 44 Solubility of Bituminous Materials
Adequate records of delivery shall be kept, and every bill of Flash Point of Asphalt Binder by
lading must show: T 48
Cleveland Open Cup
• Type of product Effect of Heat and Air on a Moving
T 240 Film of Asphalt Binder (Rolling
• Batch number
Thin-Film Oven Test)
• Mass Determining the Flexural Creep
• Relative density at 15°C Stiffness of Asphalt Binder Using
T 313
the Bending Beam Rheometer
• P.G. or Pen Specification (information) (BBR)
Trucks shall be equipped with a submerged sampling valve Determining the Rheological
system installed generally as shown on SS Drawing T 315 Properties of Asphalt Binder Using a
SP952-01 for each compartment in which asphalt material Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR)
is to be carried out.
Viscosity Determination of Asphalt
Delivery temperature of the shipment shall meet the T 316
Binder Using Rotational Viscometer
viscosity requirement shown in Table 952-C.
Multiple Stress Creep Recovery
Asphalt Emulsions and emulsified products shall be kept at (MSCR) Test of Asphalt Binder
T 350
temperatures above 5°C. Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer
(DSR)

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (2 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 436 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

Table 952-B: Standard Test Methods - ASTM (f) shall not be modified using any of the following
additives (although trace amounts in the source asphalt
ASTM TEST TITLE OF TEST: cement are permitted):
DESIGNATION Standard Test Method for… (i) polyphosphoric acid,
D5 Penetration of Bituminous Materials (ii) atactic polypropylene; carbon black;
D13 Ductility of Asphalt Materials polyisobutylene; polyisoprene; natural rubber;
alkaline bases; insoluble particulates or fibres;
Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring- heavy metals, including salts of iron, copper,
D36
and-Ball Apparatus) manganese and/or cobalt; silicates; styrene-
Density of Semi-Solid Asphalt butadiene rubber (random copolymer latex);
D70 synthetic waxes (paraffin waxes, naphthenic
Binder (Pycnometer Method)
waxes);
Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland
D92
Open Cup Tester (iii) synthetic and saturated oils (including but not
Water in Petroleum Products and limited to the following: vegetable oils or modified
D95 vegetable oils; (paraffin oils, polyalphaolefins
Bituminous Materials by Distillation
(PAO), lube oils, and re-refined lube oils.);
D113 Ductility of Asphalt Materials
(iv) waste oils (including but not limited to the
D139 Float Test for Bituminous Materials following: cracked residues, re-refined high
D243 Residue of Specified Penetration vacuum distillate oils; tall oils, vacuum tower
Standard Test Methods and Practices asphalt extenders; waste cooking oils, waste
D244 engine oils, waste engine oil residues).
for Emulsified Asphalts
D402 Distillation of Cutback Asphalt (g) may be modified using engineered vegetable oils; and
D803 Testing Tall Oil (h) The asphalt cement Supplier shall also declare in
writing on the certified batch analysis provided under
Flash Point and Fire Point of Liquids
D1310 SS 952.02.03(a):
by Tag Open-Cup Apparatus
Effects of Heat and Air on Asphaltic (i) if engineered vegetable oils are used as modifiers,
D1754 the raw materials used and their dosages; and
Materials (Thin-Film Oven Test)
Solubility of Asphalt Materials in (ii) that they have not added any of the substances
D2042 listed in SS 952.05(f) above.
Trichloroethylene
D2170 Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts Upon request, the Contractor shall forward a 4 L sample of
the product to the Ministry Representative.
Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum
D2171
Capillary Viscometer NOTE: Values for penetration and viscosity are point
Viscosity of Emulsified Asphalt by values only. Intermediate values shall be obtained by
D7496 interpolation between the tabulated values on a straight line
Saybolt Furol Viscometer
basis. Minimum viscosity at 60°C for other penetrations
can be read from the corresponding straight line on SS
Table 952-C: Viscosity Requirements for Shipment Drawing SP952-02.
Delivery Temperature 952.06 Cutback Asphalts – Cutback asphalts shall consist
essentially of petroleum derivatives and shall be
KINEMATIC substantially free from water and other impurities.
CLASS OF MATERIAL VISCOSITY
(mm²/s) Cutback asphalts shall be of the type and grade described in
Table 952-H to Table 952-K.
Cutback Asphalt for Surface
100 – 200 952.07 Asphalt Emulsions – Asphalt materials in the form
Spraying
of aqueous emulsions shall be of:
Cutback Asphalt and Asphalt
100 – 500 • Anionic Type
Cement for Plant Mixing
Tall Oil Pitch 20 – 40 • Cationic Type

Note: In no case shall asphalt materials or Tall Oil Pitch be • High Float Type
received at a viscosity outside the specified viscosity range.

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (3 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 437 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

952.08 Anionic Type Emulsion for Road Purposes – as an asphalt extender, recycling, and anti-stripping agent.
Anionic type of emulsion requirements are as follows: Where required, TOP will be added to asphalt cement in a
ratio defined by the mix design, usually between 5% – 10%.
• The asphalt emulsion shall be homogeneous. The composition and properties of TOP depends on the
• It shall show no separation of asphalt after origin and type of trees from which it is derived and the
thorough mixing within 30 days (crack filler extraction technology. Only TOP products listed in the
20 days) after delivery, provided separation has Ministry’s Recognized Product List shall be permitted for
not been caused by freezing. use on Ministry paving projects.

• The emulsion shall conform to the requirements The TOP shall conform to the requirements listed in Table
listed in Table 952-L. 952-O and Table 952-P.

952.09 Cationic Type Emulsions for Road Purposes – 952.12 Emulsified Products – Emulsified products consist
Cationic type emulsions shall conform to the requirements of emulsified Tall Oil Pitch and proprietary asphalt-based
listed in Table 952-M and shall be uniform throughout. emulsions. The emulsified products are typically used by
the Ministry, in paving operations, as prime coats and tack
952.10 High Float Emulsified Asphalt Storage stability – coats and replace organic solvent-based cutback asphalts for
High float emulsified asphalt shall show no separation of environmental reasons. Only products listed in the
asphalt within 30 days after delivery and shall be Ministry’s Recognized Product List shall be permitted for
homogeneous after thorough mixing. The emulsion shall use on the Ministry paving projects. Each batch of the
conform to the requirements listed in Table 952-N. product delivered to the job site shall be accompanied by the
952.11 Tall Oil Pitch (TOP) – Tall oil pitch, co-product of written statement from the Supplier confirming that the
the pulp and paper industry is a residual fraction from the product formulation complies with the original, previously
crude tall oil vacuum distillation process. It shall be a dark approved formulation. Emulsified Tall Oil Pitch and
brown resinous and viscous material insoluble in water but asphalt-based emulsified products shall conform to the
miscible with asphalt. TOP is typically used by the Ministry requirements listed in Table 952-Q and Table 952-R.

Table 952-D: Penetration Grades of Group A Asphalt Cement

PENETRATION GRADE ASPHALT CEMENT ASTM


REQUIREMENTS 80 – 100 120 – 150 150 – 200 200 – 300 TEST
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max METHOD
Penetration at 25°C
80 100 120 150 150 200 200 300 D5
100 g and 5 s, 0.1 mm
Minimum Viscosity at 60°C,
150 115 91 70 70 50 50 31 D2171
Pa·s
Flash Point, °C
230 --- 220 220 --- 175 --- D92
Cleveland Open Cup
Thin Film Oven Test
(TFOT) --- 0.80 0.85 --- 1.3 --- 1.5 D1754
% Loss in Mass
Penetration of Residue at D5,
25°C 100 g, 5 s, 0.1 mm, 55 --- 47 50 --- 45 --- after
% of Original Penetration TFOT.
Solubility in
Trichloroethylene 99.5 --- 99.5 99.5 --- 99.5 --- D2042
% by Mass
Ductility, 25°C
100 --- 100 --- --- --- D113
5 cm/min, cm
Ductility, 15°C
--- --- --- --- 100 --- D113
5 cm/min, cm

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (4 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 438 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

Table 952-E: Performance Grades of Asphalt Cement


PERFORMANCE GRADE
PG 64-YY PG 58-YY PG 52-YY AASHTO TEST METHOD
ASPHALT CEMENT

Min Low Temperature PG-YY -22 -28 -34 M 320, Table 1


Requirements for Minimum Pavement
Design Temperature °C PG-YY may R 29
be as specified in Special Provisions
Solubility in TCE min. %wt. 99.0 99.0 99.0 T 44

Flash, min. °C 230 230 230 T 48

DSRo, |G*|/sin δ, min, kPa @ T°C 1.00 @ 64 1.00 @ 58 1.00 @ 52 T 315

Mass Change RTFOT, max ± %wt. 1.00 1.00 1.00 T 240

DSRr, |G*|/sin δ, min, kPa @ T°C 2.20 @ 64 2.20 @ 58 2.20 @ 52 T 315

DSRp, |G*|/sin δ, max, kPa @ T°C 5000 @ 25 5000 @ 19 5000 @ 13 T 315

BBR, m-value, min, @ T°C 0.300 @ -12 0.300 @ -18 0.300 @ -24 T 313

BBR, S, max, MPa @ T°C 300 @ 12 300 @ -18 300 @ -24 T 313

Dynamic Viscosity, max, Pa·s 3.00 3.00 3.00 T 316

Table 952-F: Polymer Modified Asphalt Viscoelastic Properties

Minimum R3.2@58°C
Polymer Modified Asphalt PG Grade
per AASHTO T 350*

58-24
25%
64-28
58-37, 58-40
64-34 40%
70-28
64-37
55%
76-28
* AASHTO T 350: Multiple Stress Creep Recovery (MSCR) Test of Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer
(DSR)

Table 952-G: Pen/Performance Grade Equivalence


PEN Grade
(As specified in Table 952-D)
80/100A 120/150A 150/200A 200/300A
Equivalent Performance Grade – PG
As specified in Table 952-E PG 64-22 PG 58-28 PG 58-28 PG 52-34
Min. Pavement design Temperature °C

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (5 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 439 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

Table 952-H: Slow Curing Cutback Asphalt

GRADE
REQUIREMENTS SC – 70 SC – 250 SC – 3000
Min Max Min Max Min Max
Flash Point, °C 65 --- 80 --- 105 ---
Kinematic Viscosity at 60°C, mm2/s 70 140 250 500 3 000 6 000
Residue from Distillation to 360°C, volume % by difference 70 90 80 94 95 ---
Distillation Residue, Kinematic Viscosity at 60°C, mm2/s 400 7 000 800 10 000 4 000 35 000
ASPHALT RESIDUE:
Residue of 100 Penetration, % by Mass 50 --- 60 --- 80 ---
Ductility of 100 Penetration residue at 25°C, cm 100 --- 100 --- 100 ---
Solubility in Trichloroethylene % by mass 99.0 --- 99.0 --- 99.0 ---
Water, % by Mass or Volume --- 0.5 --- 0.5 --- 0.5

Table 952-I: Medium Curing Cutback Asphalt

GRADE
REQUIREMENTS MC – 30 MC – 250
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Flash Point, °C 38 --- 65 ---
Kinematic Viscosity at 60°C, mm2/s 30 60 250 500
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 225°C --- 25 --- 10
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 260°C 40 70 15 55
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 315°C 75 93 60 87
Residue from Distillation to 360°C, volume % by difference 50 --- 67 ---
PROPERTIES OF RESIDUE FROM DISTILLATION:
Penetration at 25°C, 100 g, 5 s, 0.1 mm 120 250 120 250
Ductility at 25°C, cm 100 --- 100 ---
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % by mass 99.0 --- 99.0 ---
Water, % --- 0.2 --- 0.2

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (6 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 440 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

Table 952-J: Rapid Curing Cutback Asphalt

GRADE
REQUIREMENTS RC – 30 RC – 70 RC – 250
Min Max Min Max Min Max
Flash Point, °C --- --- --- --- 27 ---
Kinematic Viscosity at 60°C, mm2/s 30 60 70 140 250 500
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 190°C 15 --- 10 --- --- ---
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 225°C 55 --- 50 --- 35 ---
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 260°C 75 --- 70 --- 60 ---
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 315°C 90 --- 85 --- 80 ---
Residue from Distillation to 360°C, volume % by difference 50 --- 55 --- 65 ---
TESTS ON RESIDUE FROM DISTILLATION:
Penetration at 25°C, 100 g, 5 s, 0.1 mm 80 120 80 120 80 120
Ductility at 25°C, cm 100 --- 100 --- 100 ---
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % by mass 99.0 --- 99.0 --- 99.0 ---
Water, % --- 0.2 --- 0.2 --- 0.2

Note: The material shall not foam when heated to the spraying and mixing temperature range recommended by the Canadian
General Standards Board

Table 952-K: Cutback Asphalt Primer RM20

REQUIREMENTS Min. Max.


Kinematic Viscosity at 60°C, mm2/s 20 35
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 190°C --- 60
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 225°C 40 ---
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 260°C 70 ---
Distillation Test, % of Total Distillate to 360°C: to 315°C 85 ---
Residue from Distillation to 360°C, volume % by difference 50 ---
TEST ON RESIDUE FROM DISTILLATION:
Penetration at 25°C, 100 g, 5 s, 0.1 mm 80 200
Ductility at 25°C, cm 100 ---
Solubility in Trichloroethylene % by mass 99.0 ---
Water, % --- 0.2

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (7 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 441 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

Table 952-L: Requirements for Anionic Type Emulsions

TYPE OF EMULSION
CRACK
REQUIREMENT RS – 1 RS – 2 MS – 2 SS – 1
FILLER
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
Saybolt Furol Viscosity, at 25°C,
20 100 --- --- 100 --- 20 100 50 200
Furol seconds
Saybolt Furol Viscosity, at 50°C,
--- --- 75 300 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Furol seconds
Residue by Distillation, % 57 --- 62 --- 62 --- 57 --- 65 75
Settlement, 1 Day, % --- 1.5 --- 1.5 --- 1.5 --- 1.5 --- 1.5
Demulsibility:
--- --- --- --- --- 30 --- --- --- ---
50 mL of 0.1 N CaCl2, %
Demulsibility:
60 --- 60 --- --- --- --- --- 30 ---
35 mL of 0.02 N CaCl2, %
Sieve Test, % Retained on 1 mm --- 0.10 --- 0.10 --- 0.10 --- 0.10 --- 0.10
Cement Mixing Test, % --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2.0 --- ---
TESTS ON RESIDUE:
Penetration at 25°C, 100 g, 5 s 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 60 100
Solubility in Trichloroethylene,
97.5 --- 97.5 --- 97.5 --- 97.5 --- 97.5 ---
%
Ductility at 25°C, cm 60 --- 60 --- 60 --- 60 --- 60 ---

Table 952-M: Requirements for Cationic Type Emulsions

TYPE OF EMULSION
REQUIREMENT CRS – 1K CRS – 2K
Min Max Min Max
Saybolt Furol Viscosity at 50°C, Furol seconds 30 125 174 400
% Residue by Distillation 62 --- 68 ---
Settlement 1 Day, % --- 1.5 --- 1.5
Sieve Test, % Retained on 1 mm Mesh --- 0.1 --- 0.1
Oil Portion of Distillate, % of Total Volume 0 3 0 3
Particle Charge POSITIVE POSITIVE
TESTS ON RESIDUE
Penetration at 25°C, 100 g, 5 s 100 250 100 150
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % by mass 97.5 --- 97.5 ---
Ductility at 25°C, cm 60 --- 65 ---

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (8 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 442 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

Table 952-N: Requirements for High Float Emulsified Asphalts

GRADE
HF-150P
REQUIREMENT HF-100S HF-150S HF-250S HF-350S HF-500M HF-1000M
HF -100P
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
Residue by
Distillation, 62 --- 64 62 --- 62 --- 65 --- 65 --- 65 ---
% By Mass
Oil Distillate,
1 4 0.5 4 1 4 1 6 1.5 6 1 6 1 7
% By Volume
Saybolt Furol
Viscosity,
35 150 35 120 35 150 35 150 75 400 50 --- 50 ---
@ 50°C, Furol
seconds
Sieve Test,
% Retained on --- 0.1 --- --- --- 0.1 --- 0.1 --- 0.1 --- 0.1 --- 0.1
1 mm Sieve
Coating Test, % 90 --- 90 --- 90 --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Settlement, 1 Day,
--- 1.5 --- --- --- 1.5 --- 1.5 --- 1.5 --- 1.5 --- 1.5
% By Mass
Demulsibility:
50 mL 5.55 g/L 75 --- 75 75 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
CaCl2, % By Mass
Workability
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Pass ---
@ 10°C
TESTS ON RESIDUE
Penetration at
* * ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** --- --- --- ---
25°C, 100 g, 5 s
Viscosity at 60°C,
8 20 2 8
Pas
Float Test at 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
--- --- --- --- --- ---
60°C, s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Solubility in
Trichloroethylene, 97.5 --- 97.5 --- 97.5 --- 97.5 --- 97.5 --- 97.5 ---
%

* See Drawing SP952-02


** See Drawing SP952-03 or Drawing SP952-05
Note For HF-150P, penetration tests shall be conducted on residue which has been distilled to 201°C ± 5°C

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (9 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 443 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

Table 952-O: Tall Oil Pitch Viscosity and Penetration Data

REQUIREMENTS Min. Max.


Results on Original Sample
Absolute Viscosity, 60°C, Pa·s 1 2
Kinematic Viscosity, 135°C, mm /s 2
25 35
Penetration, 4°C/100g, 5 sec, 0.1 mm 150 250

Results after Thin Film Oven


Loss in weight, % --- 0.65
Absolute Viscosity, 60°C, Pa·s --- 3
Kinematic Viscosity, 135°C, mm2/s --- 60
Penetration, 4°C, 100 g, 5 sec, 0.1 mm 75 ---

Table 952-P: Tall Oil Pitch Data

ASTM
REQUIREMENTS TEST Min. Max.
METHOD
Softening Point, °C D36 --- 35
Flash Point, Cleveland Open Cup, °C D92 250 ---
Fire Point, Cleveland Open Cup, °C D92 275 ---
Boiling Point, °C 320 ---
Specific Gravity 0.94 0.98
Vapour Pressure, mm Hg --- 1
pH 3.75 4.25
Wood Extractive, % 98 ---
Ash, % D803 --- 0.8
Moisture, % D803 --- 0.1
Fatty Acids, % 7 9
Resin Acids, % 5 7
Unsaponifiables, % 39 44
Neutrals, % 42 46
Acid Number 20 30

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (10 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 444 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

Table 952-Q: Emulsified Tall Oil Pitch

REQUIREMENTS Min. Max.


Viscosity, Saybolt Furol, 25°C, Furol seconds 10 30
Residue by Distillation, % by weight 40 ---
Oil Distillate, % by volume --- 0.1
Settlement 24 hrs, % --- 1.5
pH 6 8
Particle Charge Negative
Miscibility with Water Pass
Specific Gravity, 20°C Approx. 1.0
Boiling Point, °C 100
Freezing Point, °C 0
Vapour Pressure, mm Hg 20
Odour and Appearance – distinctive resinous odour, light yellow colour
TEST ON RESIDUE – Shall conform to the requirements for Tall Oil Pitch listed in Table 952-O

Table 952-R: Emulsified Products

REQUIREMENTS Min. Max.


Viscosity, Saybolt Furol, 25°C, Furol seconds 10 60
Residue by Distillation, % by weight 40 ---
Oil Distillate, % by Volume --- 5
Settlement 24 hrs, % Pass
Miscibility with Water Pass
TEST ON RESIDUE
Penetration, 25°C, 100 g, 5 sec, 0.1 mm 40 200

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (11 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 445 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

APPENDIX 952-A

The following data is required from the Supplier.

PEN GRADED ASPHALT CEMENTS CUTBACK ASPHALTS


Grade and Type (when required) A. Cutback Asphalts as Supplied
A. Original Asphalt • Flash Point, T.O.C. (C.O.C. above
Anti-stripping agents (if any) – provide product 79°C)
name and dosage rate. • Density @ 15°C, g/cm3
• Viscosity @ 60°C, mm2/s
Density @ 15°C, kg/L • Distillate, % by volume of Total
• Viscosity @ 135°C ➢ Distillate to 360°C
• Viscosity @ 60°C ➢ Distillate to 190°C
• Penetration @ 25°C, 100 g/5 s ➢ Distillate to 225°C
• Solubility in Trichloroethylene ➢ Distillate to 260°C
• Ductility @ 25°C ➢ Distillate to 315°C
• Flash Point C.O.C. • Residue from Distillation to 360°C
• % Retained Penetration after T.F.O.T. @ • Volume % by Difference
25°C
B. Properties of Residue
B. Residue After T.F.O.T. • Penetration @ 25°C
(when Type A required) • Ductility @ 25°C
• Penetration @ 25°C • Solubility in Trichloroethylene, %
• Penetration @ 10°C
• Penetration @ 4°C C. Residue of 100 Penetration by Mass
NOTE: Viscosity – Temperature chart also • Ductility of 100 Penetration at 25°C, cm
required for each batch.

PERFORMANCE GRADED CEMENTS EMULSIONS


A. Original Asphalt A. Original Emulsion
Anti-stripping agents (if any) – provide product • Saybolt Furol Viscosity @ 25°C
name and dosage rate. • Saybolt Furol Viscosity @ 50°C
• Density @ 15°C, kg/L • % Residue by Distillation
• Viscosity @ 135°C • Settlement in 5 Days, %
• Solubility in Trichloroethylene • Oil Portion of Disillate
• Flash Point • % to Total Volume
• Stiffness, DSRo
B. Tests on Residue
• Mass Change
• Stiffness, DSRr • Float Test @ 60°C, s
• Stiffness, DSRp • Penetration @ 25°C, 100 g/5 s
• BBR m-value • Ductility @ 25°C
• BBR Stiffness.

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (12 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 446 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (13 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 447 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (14 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 448 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (15 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 449 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

SP952-04
INTENTIONALLY DELETED.

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (16 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 450 of 452
SECTION 952 CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT
AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE

BC MoTI SS 2020 952 (17 of 17)


Vol. 2 Page 451 of 452
SECTION 991

CALCIUM CHLORIDE AND SODIUM CHLORIDE

991.01 Calcium Chloride – Calcium chloride, for highway Table 991-A: Gradation for Sodium Chloride
purposes, shall conform to ASTM D98. It shall be supplied
as: Screen Size (mm) % Passing
• Type I Regular (77%) bulk (flake) or sacked; or
12.0 (1/2”) 100
• as liquid at 35% solution concentration,
9.00 (3/8”) 90 – 100
as specified in the Contract or purchase order.
991.02 Sodium Chloride – Sodium chloride, for highway 4.75 (#4) 35 – 85
purposes, shall conform to ASTM D632 but it shall be
supplied within the gradation shown in Table 991-A. 2.40 (#8) 15 – 55

991.03 Chemical Contamination of Road Salt – When 1.20 (#16) 5 – 30


applied as specified, the de-icing chemicals shall not contain
substances that exceed the current environmental 0.600 (#30) 0 – 10
guidelines, Provincial or Federal, and shall not cause harm
to flora and fauna.
Note: ASTM specifications are available through:
https://www.astm.org/Standard/standards-and-
publications.html

BC MoTI SS 2020 991 (1 of 1)


Vol. 2 Page 452 of 452

You might also like